Lucent Technologies SLC-2000 User & Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Lucent Technologies Manuals
  4. Wireless Access Point
  5. SLC-2000 Access System Central Office...
  6. User & service manual
Lucent Technologies SLC-2000 User & Service Manual

Lucent Technologies SLC-2000 User & Service Manual

Access system
Hide thumbs Also See for SLC-2000:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
SLC
-2000 Access System
®
User/Service Manual
363-208-001
Issue 9
April 1998

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the SLC-2000 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Related Manuals for Lucent Technologies SLC-2000

Summary of Contents for Lucent Technologies SLC-2000

  • Page 1 -2000 Access System ® User/Service Manual 363-208-001 Issue 9 April 1998...
  • Page 2 In such event, applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
  • Page 3 Date: 363-208-001 April 1998 Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this Customer Information Product (CIP). Your comments can be of great value in helping us improve our CIPs. 1. Please rate the effectiveness of this CIP in the following areas:...
  • Page 4 ---------------------------------------------------------------- Do Not Cut — Fold Here And Tape ------------------------------------------------------------------------- NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 1999 GREENSBORO, NC POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE DOCUMENTATION SERVICES 2400 Reynolda Road Winston-Salem, NC 27199-2029...
  • Page 5 Date: 363-208-001 April 1998 Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this Customer Information Product (CIP). Your comments can be of great value in helping us improve our CIPs. 1. Please rate the effectiveness of this CIP in the following areas:...
  • Page 6 ---------------------------------------------------------------- Do Not Cut — Fold Here And Tape ------------------------------------------------------------------------- NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 1999 GREENSBORO, NC POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE DOCUMENTATION SERVICES 2400 Reynolda Road Winston-Salem, NC 27199-2029...
  • Page 7 Contents About This Document Purpose Scope Intended Audience xxii Reason for Reissue xxii How to Use This Document xxiii Conventions Used Product Safety xxvi Customer Assistance and Technical Support xxix Related Documentation/Training Electronic Documentation xxxviii How to Order Documents xxxviii How to Comment on This Document xxxix System Overview...
  • Page 8 Contents MDS Assembly Common/Channel Unit Configurations 2-53 COT Cable Assemblies 2-53 RT Cable Assemblies 2-53 Operations Interfaces Introduction Craft Interface Terminal (CIT) User Interface Panel (UIP) Equipment Indicators Office Alarms TL1/X.25 Interface 3-11 Serial Telemetry Byte-Oriented Serial (TBOS) 3-12 Parallel Telemetry 3-13 Miscellaneous Discrete Environmental Alarms and Controls (User-Definable)
  • Page 9 Contents Administration and Provisioning Introduction Administration — SONET and Digital Loop Carrier (DLC) Subsystems Administration — Multiplexing and Mapping 5-13 Administration — Integral Test Head (ITH) 5-20 Provisioning — SONET Subsystem 5-22 Provisioning — DLC Subsystem 5-48 Plug-In Data Sheets Software Release Descriptions Technical Reference(s) Fiber Service Module (FSM)
  • Page 10 Contents Index IN-1 Issue 9 April 1998...

  • Page 11: Table Of Contents

    Figures About This Document Static Control Wrist Strap xxviii System Overview ® -2000 Access System Remote Terminal Bays The SLC -2000 Access System Equipped for COT Applications Product Description Access Resource Manager (ARM) Shelf Slots PDC Complex SONET Feeder Section DS1 Low-Speed Interface Section 2-18 DS1/VT Feeder Interface Section...
  • Page 12 Figures 2-17 RT/HDT Bay Cable Assembly — Bay Cables 2-55 2-18 RT/HDT Bay Cable Assembly — Standard Shelf Danglers 2-56 2-19 RT/HDT Bay Cable Assembly — Optional Shelf Danglers 2-57 2-20 RT/HDT Bay Cable Assembly — Backplane or Intrashelf Connections 2-58 2-21 RT/HDT Bay Cable Assembly —...
  • Page 13 Figures Block Diagram of the Fiber Service Module (FSM) in a Typical HDT-to-NBS Arrangement FSM with Circuit Packs Recommended FSM Arrangement in the HDT FSM DSX-1 Wiring Diagram at HDT A-10 FSM Wiring Diagram at HDT A-11 FSM Equipment in the 841 MSDT Cabinet A-13 FSM Protectors, Wiring Blocks, and Feeder/Distribution Panel in the 841 Cabinet...
  • Page 14 Tables System Overview COT/RT DLC Software Release Compatibility Product Description Optical Line Interface (OLIU) Comparison 2-12 -2000 Access System Channel Units 2-35 ® -2000 Access System Software Package ® Compatibilities 2-47 Operations and Maintenance Procedures (TOP) DS1 Line Coding and Format 4-12 VTU/LIU Slot to MDS Standard DS1 System Map (TR-08)
  • Page 15 Tables SONET Subsystem OC-3 Manual STS-1 Cross-Connections (Rings Pass Through) 5-29 SONET Subsystem OC-3 Manual STS-1 Cross-Connections (Rings Drop and Continue) 5-30 5-10 SONET Subsystem OC-3 Manual VT1.5 Cross-Connections (Termination/Drop) 5-30 5-11 SONET Subsystem OC-3 Manual VT1.5 Cross-Connections (Hub/Drop) 5-31 5-12 SONET Subsystem OC-3 Manual VT1.5 Cross-Connections (Add)
  • Page 16 Tables 5-29 R3.1 and R3.2 DS0A Function Code Provisioning (AUA34) 5-64 5-30 R3.1 and R3.2 DS0A Function Code Provisioning (AUA34B) 5-64 5-31 R3.1 and R3.2 DS0B Function Code Provisioning (AUA34) 5-64 5-32 R3.1 and R3.2 DS0B Function Code Provisioning (AUA34B) 5-65 5-33 R3.1 and R3.2 DX4 Function Code Provisioning...
  • Page 17 Tables 5-55 R3.3 DS0B Function Code Provisioning (AUA34B) 5-74 5-56 R3.3 DS0B Function Code Provisioning ( SPQ 334) 5-74 5-57 R3.3 DX4 Function Code Provisioning 5-75 5-58 R3.3 EBS Function Code Provisioning 5-75 5-59 R3.3 EM4C/H Function Code Provisioning 5-76 5-60 R3.3 ETO4 Function Code Provisioning 5-76...
  • Page 18 Tables 5-86 R4.0 FXS/T Function Code Provisioning 5-88 5-87 R4.0 GO Function Code Provisioning 5-88 5-88 R4.0 GS Function Code Provisioning 5-88 5-89 R4.0 LO Function Code Provisioning 5-89 5-90 R4.0 LR Function Code Provisioning 5-89 5-91 R4.0 LS Function Code Provisioning 5-89 5-92 R4.0 NO Function Code Provisioning...
  • Page 19 Tables 5-119 R4.2 LR Function Code Provisioning 5-99 5-120 R4.2 LS Function Code Provisioning 5-99 5-121 R4.2 NO Function Code Provisioning 5-100 5-122 R4.2 OCU Function Code Provisioning (AUA52/AUA152) 5-100 5-123 R4.2 OCU Function Code Provisioning (AUA52B) 5-101 R4.2 OCU Function Code Provisioning ( SPQ 452) 5-101 5-124 5-125 R4.2 PG5, PG8, PG15, and PG20 Function...
  • Page 20 Tables 5-150 R4.4 GS Function Code Provisioning 5-111 5-151 R4.4 LO Function Code Provisioning 5-111 5-152 R4.4 LR Function Code Provisioning 5-111 5-153 R4.4 LS Function Code Provisioning 5-111 5-154 R4.4 NO Function Code Provisioning 5-112 5-155 R4.4 OCU Function Code Provisioning (AUA52/AUA152) 5-112 5-156...
  • Page 21 Tables 5-180 R4.5 FXS Function Code Provisioning 5-122 5-181 R4.5 FXS/T Function Code Provisioning 5-122 5-182 R4.5 GO Function Code Provisioning 5-122 5-183 R4.5 GS Function Code Provisioning 5-123 5-184 R4.5 ISDN Function Code Provisioning 5-123 5-185 R4.5 LO Function Code Provisioning 5-123 5-186 R4.5 LR Function Code Provisioning...
  • Page 22 Tables 5-211 R4.6 ETO4 Function Code Provisioning 5-132 5-212 R4.6 FXO Function Code Provisioning 5-133 5-213 R4.6 FXO/P Function Code Provisioning 5-133 5-214 R4.6 FXS Function Code Provisioning 5-134 5-215 R4.6 FXS/T Function Code Provisioning 5-134 5-216 R4.6 GO Function Code Provisioning 5-134 5-217 R4.6 GS Function Code Provisioning...

  • Page 23: About This Document

    About This Document Purpose The User/Service Manual provides the information needed by installation, operation, and maintenance personnel to turn up, operate, and maintain the ® -2000 Access System. Scope This document contains the following descriptive and procedural information: High-level description of the system and the network Product description Operations interfaces description Procedures for major post-installation service (for example, acceptance...
  • Page 24 363-208-001 About This Document Intended Audience The User/Service Manual is intended for the following customers who participate in the engineering, installation, and maintenance of the system: Equipment engineers and outside plant engineers Transmission engineers Installation, operation, and maintenance personnel Central office operations personnel Operations center personnel that use centralized operations systems for surveillance or provisioning System administrators...
  • Page 25 363-208-001 About This Document How to Use This Document This document has the following organization: "About This Document" This section defines the purpose, scope, and intended audience for this document; provides introductory and support information on this document; includes the bibliography ( references ); lists training courses; and lists information on how to obtain technical support.
  • Page 26 363-208-001 About This Document Chapter 4, "Operations and Maintenance Procedures (TOP)" This chapter contains procedures for acceptance testing, access resource manager (ARM) shelf turnup, high density optics shelf (HDOS) turnup and end-to-end testing, metallic distribution shelf turnup and end-to-end testing, circuit order procedures (including channel unit installation), and trouble clearing.
  • Page 27 The trademark is never used by itself — the trademark always modifies a noun (for example, SPOTS ® channel units). Lucent Technologies trademarks are identified on first use in each chapter (in the ® table of contents, text, and headings) with the registered mark ( ) or trademark ™...
  • Page 28 363-208-001 About This Document Task-oriented practice procedures may be referred to as TOP, TOPs, or TOP procedures. The term pipe in customer DS1 pipes means to transmit the complete 1.544-Mb/s signal through the network without demultiplexing it to individual (DS0) channels (clear channel DS1 path). Product Safety WARNING: Only trained service personnel should perform the procedures in this...
  • Page 29 A Lucent Technologies lightwave digital transmission system and associated optical test sets use semiconductor laser transmitters. The lasers emit lightwaves, at or near infrared wavelengths, into lightguide fibers.

  • Page 30: Static Control Wrist Strap

    363-208-001 About This Document If possible, open all circuit packs at a static-safe work position, using properly grounded wrist straps and static-dissipating table mats. If a static-dissipating table mat is used, be sure that it is clean to ensure a good discharge path.
  • Page 31 About This Document Customer Assistance and Technical Support Lucent Technologies provides customer assistance on the SLC -2000 Access System including, but not limited to, troubleshooting assistance, technical consultation, operational problem consultation, procedural advice, and emergency recovery assistance from a qualified system support professional from the Regional Technical Assistance Center (RTAC).
  • Page 32 SLC-2000 Access System Documentation Plan The following documents provide additional information about the SLC -2000 Access System: 363-205-004, SLC-2000 Multi-Services Distant Terminal (MSDT) Feature, User/Service and Ordering Manual Audience — Engineers, network planners, product evaluators, standardization groups, installers, administrators, operation and maintenance personnel, and technical support.
  • Page 33 Audience — Operation, maintenance, technical support, and training personnel. Content — Acceptance, system turnup/circuit order, operation, and trouble-clearing procedures. 363-208-000, SLC-2000 Access System, Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide Audience — Network planners, engineers, product evaluators, standardization groups, and ordering personnel.
  • Page 34 The document pages are organized by user interface panel (UIP) commands and craft interface terminal (CIT) commands. 363-208-010, SLC-2000 Access System, Customer Assembly Manual for remote terminal (RT) Frames Audience — Customers that plan to install the equipment.
  • Page 35 363-208-001 About This Document 363-208-022, SLC-2000 Access System, Software Release Description, Release 3.3 Audience — Installers, technicians, engineers, and troubleshooters. Content — Provides information about the software release and procedures for implementation. Describes the features and capabilities provided in the release. Lists operating issues from the previous release that have been resolved, the operating issues in this release, and any workarounds.
  • Page 36 363-208-001 About This Document 363-208-028, SLC-2000 Access System, Software Release Description, Release 4.6 Audience — Installers, technicians, engineers, and troubleshooters. Content — Provides information about the software release and procedures for implementation. Describes the features and capabilities provided in the release. Lists operating issues from the previous release that have been resolved, the operating issues in this release, and any workarounds.
  • Page 37 (TOP procedures) — 915-710-116, SLC Series 5 Carrier System, Channel Unit Application and Prescription Setting . Administration — 363-208-001, SLC-2000 Access System, User/Service Manual . Remote Operations — 824-102-148, 2000 Family of Products Operations System Engineering Guide (OSEG) — 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages .
  • Page 38 Media —Instructor-led format with visual media and class discussion. End-of-unit review exercises are used to reinforce the lecture. Each student will be provided with 363-208-000, SLC-2000 Access System, Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide . Prerequisite —Students should have a general knowledge of transmission principles obtained by previous transmission experience or attendance in course TR0510 —...
  • Page 39 1-888-LUCENT8 (582-3688) When you call 1-888-LUCENT8, select Option 2 (press on a touch-tone phone) for Lucent Technologies product training. Internet access to training course catalogs, schedules, availability, and other course related information can be found at: http://www.lucent.product-training.com/catalog Enrollment forms can be faxed to (407) 767-2677.
  • Page 40 * For commercial customers, a check, money order, purchase order number, or charge card number is required with all orders. Make checks payable to Lucent Technologies. Lucent Technologies entities should use Form IND 1-80.80 FA, available through the Customer Information Center.
  • Page 41 Feedback forms are located near the front of this document immediately after the title page. If the feedback forms are missing, please send your comments and suggestions to: Lucent Technologies Network Systems Customer Training and Information Products Organization Documentation Services...

  • Page 42: System Overview

    System Overview Contents Introduction ® -2000 Access System Description SONET Subsystem DLC Subsystem Circuit Maintenance Subsystem Feeder Configurations User Access User Interface Panel (UIP) Craft Interface Terminal (CIT) Terminal Applications Remote Terminal or Host Digital Terminal (RT/HDT) Central Office Terminal (COT) SLC -2000 COT and RT Compatibility Software Feature Releases Related Systems...
  • Page 43 This chapter describes the Lucent Technologies SLC -2000 Access System and its architecture. Refer to 363-208-000, SLC-2000 Access System, Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide (APOG), for details on system features and benefits, planned feature releases, Service Net-2000 architecture, and the synchronous optical network (SONET) along with engineering and ordering information.

  • Page 44: System Overview

    363-208-001 System Overview Metallic distribution TR-08 standard interface † TR-303 interface INA interface (PUB43801). The system consists of three functional subsystems (SONET, DLC, and ITH). The SONET subsystem provides an OC-3/OC-12 feeder for point-to-point and linear drop configurations and path-switched ring applications. [The linear drop arrangement allows synchronous transport signal level 1 (STS-1) or virtual tributary 1.5 (VT1.5) signals to be dropped off at intermediate points along a SONET feeder route instead of running feeders from the central office to each...
  • Page 45 363-208-001 System Overview DLC Subsystem The DLC subsystem supports all of the transmission, signaling, alarming, and maintenance features for the 1,152 FITL subscriber lines. TR-08 Mode 1 supports 672 lines organized into seven 96-line virtual remote terminals (VRTs). Mode 2 supports 768 lines organized into eight 96-line VRTs.
  • Page 46 363-208-001 System Overview Craft Interface Terminal (CIT) To support more complex applications and maintenance, you can connect a CIT to a port on the UIP. The CIT can be either an American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) terminal or a personal computer (PC) running software that emulates an ASCII terminal.
  • Page 47 363-208-001 System Overview Host Digital Terminal: Access lines from customer equipment terminate on a distant terminal (DT) that is "hosted" by the SLC -2000 system. In this case, the SLC -2000 HDT "extends" its MDS assembly channel slots to a DT that is usually located even closer to the customer.

  • Page 48: -2000 Access System Remote Terminal Bays

    363-208-001 System Overview Fan unit HDOS shelf No. 2 HDOS shelf No. 1 Fan unit Fan unit User Interface Panel User Interface Panel ARM shelf ARM shelf MDS assembly No. 4 MDS assembly No. 4 MDS assembly No. 3 MDS assembly No. 3 MDS assembly No.

  • Page 49: The Slc -2000 Access System Equipped For Cot Applications

    363-208-001 System Overview Central Office Terminal (COT) The central office terminal (COT) system architecture is also modular and completely connectorized for installation in COT bays (Figure 1-2). System components include the following: ARM shelf MDS assembly Heat baffles Alarm and test unit (ATU) panel UIP.

  • Page 50: Cot/Rt Dlc Software Release Compatibility

    † ‡ 3.2, 3.3 Note: Refer to document 363-208-000, SLC-2000 Access System, Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide , for any restrictions that may apply to a specific release compatibility. * The SLC -2000 Release 2.0 RT is not compatible with the SLC -2000 software Release 3.1/3.2/3.3 COT.
  • Page 51 Related Systems The SLC -2000 Access System is a basic element in the Lucent Technologies Network Systems Service Net-2000 integrated SONET architecture. Service Net-2000 is based on standard interfaces and uses common network elements...

  • Page 52: Product Description

    Product Description Contents Introduction Access Resource Manager (ARM) Shelf Provisioning and Display Controller (PDC) Complex PDC Slot System Memory Unit (SMU) Slot Link to Alarms and Networks (LAN) Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Feeder Section System Controller (SYSCTL) Slot Overhead Controller (OHCTL) Slot Synchronous Timing Generator (TGS) Slots Main and Function Unit Slots DS1 Low-Speed Interface Section (Eight Slots)
  • Page 53 Contents Craft Access Unit (CAU) Slot 2-25 Transmission Signaling Unit (TSU) Slot 2-25 Power Converter Unit (PCU) Slot 2-25 User Interface Panel (UIP) 2-26 Alarm Test Unit (ATU) Panel (COT Only) 2-27 MDS Assembly 2-28 Common Units 2-32 Channel Units 2-32 DT Server 2-34...
  • Page 54 For a detailed description of the SLC -2000 Access System and its equipment, features, applications, and operational information, see 363-208-000, SLC-2000 Access System Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide . For detailed information on the SLC -2000 host digital terminal/multi-services distant terminal (HDT/MSDT) and its equipment,...

  • Page 55: Product Description

    363-208-001 Product Description Host Digital Terminal (HDT) [fiber in the loop (FITL) application]: — ARM shelf — MDS assemblies — High density optics shelves (HDOSs) — UIP — Fan units. Host Digital Terminal (HDT) [FiberReach application]: — ARM shelf — MDS assemblies —...
  • Page 56 363-208-001 Product Description Access Resource Manager (ARM) Shelf The ARM shelf includes the entire synchronous optical network (SONET) and integral test head (ITH) subsystems, and a part of the digital loop carrier (DLC) subsystem. The ARM shelf is divided into the following functional groups (sections) (Figure 2-1): Provisioning and display controller (PDC) complex SONET feeder...
  • Page 57 363-208-001 Product Description System Memory Unit (SMU) Slot The BBF261 SMU contains the DLC subsystem software for the SLC -2000 Access System. Failure of an SMU does not affect service as long as the system is not installing software when the failure occurs. The SMU and a working PDC must be present in the ARM shelf to ensure that the common circuit packs in the DLC subsystem will have the correct software.

  • Page 58: Access Resource Manager (Arm) Shelf Slots

    363-208-001 Product Description Figure 2-1. Access Resource Manager (ARM) Shelf Slots Issue 9 April 1998...

  • Page 59: Pdc Complex

    363-208-001 Product Description S1:1 S1:1 S1:1 Note: configuration shown is f or Release 4.0 and later use a Releases 3.1, 3.2, and 3.3 circuit pack. BBF240 f or the PDC FAULT FAULT FAULT DSBLD ACTIVE USER INTERFACE PANEL Enter Update Minor pdcR4.eps Figure 2-2.
  • Page 60 363-208-001 Product Description Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Feeder Section Figure 2-3 shows the SONET feeder section in the ARM shelf and its slots. System Controller (SYSCTL) Slot The system controller (SYSCTL) and the overhead controller (OHCTL) supervise the circuit packs in the SONET feeder and DS1 distribution sections of the ARM shelf.

  • Page 61: Sonet Feeder Section

    363-208-001 Product Description S1:1 S1:1 S1:1 S1:1 S1:1 S1:1 S1:1 S1:1 S1:1 OLIU OLIU MXRVO MXRVO MXRVO MXRVO OHCTL SYSCTL FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE TGS 2 S1:1 FAULT ACTIVE TGS 1 OHCTL...
  • Page 62 363-208-001 Product Description Overhead Controller (OHCTL) Slot The overhead controller (OHCTL) and the system controller provide control and interface functions for the SONET subsystem. Failure of the overhead controller does not affect service. However, while the overhead controller is in a failed condition or has been removed from the shelf, do not remove other circuit packs from the SONET subsystem.
  • Page 63 363-208-001 Product Description In SLC -2000 Software Release 4.4 and later, FUNCTION C can contain 27G-U OLIUs. These OLIUs can provide a "host" for the DDM-2000 FiberReach wideband shelf (WBS) OC-1 ring (SONET subsystem Software Release 9.0 and later). When used in this configuration, the WBS uses FUNCTION C for an X.25 interface.
  • Page 64 363-208-001 Product Description In VT1.5 cross-connect applications, VT1.5 pointer processing is done on each STS-1 that is to be VT1.5 cross-connected. STS-1 path overhead termination is also done on these VT1.5 bases signals. STS-1s that do not require VT1.5 cross-connections are passed through without VT1.5 pointer processing or STS-1 path overhead termination.

  • Page 65: Slc

    363-208-001 Product Description Table 2-1. Optical Line Interface (OLIU) Comparison Typical ® OLIU System -2000 Code Application Reach Fiber Mode Connector Slot Location ® OC-3 Linear Short Multimode lightguide Main 21D-U OC-3 Linear Short Multimode Universal optical Main ST lightguide OC-3 Linear Long Single- or...
  • Page 66 363-208-001 Product Description Various combinations of buildouts and connectors are also available. The 21D/21D-U OLIU circuit pack provides cost-effective interconnect for intraoffice applications and is used only for DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 interworking over multimode fiber. 21G/21G-U Optical Line Interface Unit (21G/21G-U OLIU). The 21G/21G-U OLIU multiplexes three STS-1 signals to an STS-3, inserts the SONET transport overhead bytes (line and section), and scrambles the resulting signal.
  • Page 67 363-208-001 Product Description 22F Optical Line Interface Unit (22F OLIU). The 22F OLIU circuit pack multiplexes three STS-1 signals to an STS-3, inserts the SONET transport overhead bytes (line and section), and scrambles the resulting signal. This STS-3 signal drives the laser transmitter to create the OC-3 output. The received OC-3 signal is converted back to an electrical STS-3.
  • Page 68 363-208-001 Product Description The received OC-3 signal is converted back to an electrical STS-3. This STS-3 is descrambled and demultiplexed to three STS-1 signals, and transport/path overhead is accessed. Some of the overhead (for example, section data communications channel) is passed by means of serial data links to the control packs, while other bytes (for example, framing, parity check) are processed on-board.
  • Page 69 363-208-001 Product Description In the transmit direction, STS-1 signals from the backplane first encounter the TSI function. In the MAIN slot, the TSI is controlled by user provisioning. It connects time slots from function group A toward the MAIN fiber, or back to function group C.
  • Page 70 363-208-001 Product Description A received OC-1 signal is converted back to an electrical STS-1. This STS-1 is descrambled and demultiplexed and transport/path overhead is accessed. Some of the overhead (for example, section data communications channel) is passed by means of serial data links to the control packs, while other bytes (for example, framing, parity check) are processed on-board.

  • Page 71: Ds1 Low-Speed Interface Section

    363-208-001 Product Description In the transmit direction, four DS1 signals are mapped into floating mode asynchronous VT1.5s with VT path overhead then multiplexed into the VT-G signal. The VT-G signal is sent to the STS-1 multiplexer circuit pack (MXRVO for the "C" SONET multiplexer group). In the receive direction, a VT-G received from the STS-1 multiplexer circuit pack is demultiplexed into four VT1.5 signals and passed through circuitry to interpret VT pointers and access path overhead.
  • Page 72 363-208-001 Product Description Feeder Section (DS1/VT Feeder Interface) (Eight Slots) The DS1/VT feeder interface section (Figure 2-5) interfaces between the core (bandwidth section) and the SONET feeder or DS1 feeder (DSX-1) interface. For SONET configurations: This section contains the virtual tributary units (VTUs) that convert the SONET VT-Gs to the internal transmission format for the bandwidth management complex.

  • Page 73: Ds1/Vt Feeder Interface Section

    363-208-001 Product Description DS1 Line Interface Unit (LIU) The BBG267 LIU circuit pack maps four sets of 24 DS0 channels (from the TSI/BMP) into DS1 signals for a DSX-1 cross-connection. The LIU replaces the VTU in Figure 2-5 for DS1 feeder applications. With metallic feeder, the SYSCTL (with software) and OHCTL circuit packs are required;...
  • Page 74 363-208-001 Product Description Bandwidth Management Section The bandwidth management section is the transmission hub of the SLC -2000 Access System and provides the interface between the SONET or DS1 feeder and the subscriber distribution. The bandwidth management section provides synchronization and time slot interchange functions. For TR-303 operation, the bandwidth management section also supports the time slot management channel (TMC) and embedded operations channel (EOC) interfaces to the local digital switch.
  • Page 75 363-208-001 Product Description Time Slot Interchange (TSI) Slot ® The BDK 250 TSI allows a nonblocking, full access, time slot interchange of a maximum number of distribution time slots (768 or 1,152) onto 672 feeder time slots. In TR-08 Mode 1 digroups, TR-303 VRTs, and integrated network access (INA) DS1s, the TSI allows any distribution channel to be mapped to any feeder channel.

  • Page 76: Bandwidth Management Section

    363-208-001 Product Description Note: The BMP circuit packs are used with Release 4.0 and later. S1:1 S1:1 S1:1 S1:1 FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE -48V(UIP)/2A -48V(A)/10A -48V -48V -48V DDS Clock DDS DS0 DS1 T1-R1 E&M Panel Fault Attention Critical Major...

  • Page 77: Integral Test Head Location

    363-208-001 Product Description Integral Test Head (ITH) Section The ITH provides local test access. The ARM shelf contains the ITH (optional) (Figure 2-7) which consists of the following components: Test head controller (THC) Analog measurement unit (AMU) Power amplifier unit (PAU) Craft access unit (CAU) Transmission signaling unit (TSU) Power converter unit (PCU).
  • Page 78 363-208-001 Product Description Test Head Controller (THC) Slot The BBG220 THC is a microprocessor-based circuit pack that handles all processing and control functions for the integral test head (ITH). The THC configures the ITH measurement modules (the PAU, AMU, and TSU) for testing. Analog Measurement Unit (AMU) Slot The BBF221 AMU contains precision analog measurement circuits for plain old telephone service (POTS) testing.
  • Page 79 363-208-001 Product Description User Interface Panel (UIP) The UIP (Figure 2-8) supports the following installation and maintenance functions: Alarm display Alarm and fault reports Basic provisioning Maintenance jacks Craft terminal connection. NOTE: See Chapter 3, "Operations Interfaces," for detailed information on the UIP. -48V(UIP)/2A -48V(A)/10A -48V...

  • Page 80: Alarm Test Unit (Atu) Panel

    The interface to the pair gain test controller (PGTC) for channel testing DC bypass pair connections. See Chapter 3 for more details on office alarms and parallel telemetry. Also, see document 363-208-011, SLC-2000 Access System, Customer Assembly Manual for COT Frames , for more details on the ATU panel. Fault...
  • Page 81 363-208-001 Product Description MDS Assembly The metallic distribution shelf (MDS) assembly (Figure 2-10) provides control and distribution for DS0-based metallic services using common units and channel units. Also, the MDS assembly provides control and distribution for DS0-based 12- and 24-line fiber in the loop (FITL) fiber services (Figure 2-11 for Software Release 4.4 or earlier, Figures 2-12 and 2-13 for Software Release 4.5 or later) using common units and DT servers.

  • Page 82: Mds Assembly - 12- And 24-Line Fitl Configuration (R4.0 To R4.4)

    363-208-001 Product Description Side 1 Shelf 2 Side 2 Shelf 2 DT Ser ers DT Servers Common units 1,3,5,7 13,15,17,19 Metallic Distribution Shelf SPQ808 SPQ808 SPQ808 SPQ808 SPQ808 SPQ808 SPQ808 SPQ808 FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL Shelf (upper) CONFIG CONFIG...

  • Page 83: Mds Assembly - 12- And 24-Line Fitl

    363-208-001 Product Description Side 1 Shelf 2 Side 2 Shelf 2 DT Servers DT Servers Common units 1,3,5,7,9 13,15,17,19,21 Metallic Distribution Shelf SPQ810 SPQ810 SPQ810 SPQ810 SPQ810 SPQ810 SPQ810 SPQ810 SPQ810 SPQ810 FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL Shelf...

  • Page 84: Mds Assembly - 12- And 24-Line Fitl

    363-208-001 Product Description Side 1 Shelf 2 Side 2 Shelf 2 DT Servers DT Servers Common units 1,3,5,7,9,11† 13,15,17,19,21,23† Metallic Distribution Shelf SPQ811 SPQ811 SPQ811 SPQ811 SPQ811 SPQ811 SPQ811 SPQ811 SPQ811 SPQ811 SPQ811 SPQ811 FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL...
  • Page 85 363-208-001 Product Description Software Release 4.5 or Later With SPQ 810 Servers: Figure 2-12 shows a full MDS assembly when the SLC -2000 Access System contains R4.5 or later software with SPQ 810 DT Servers. Each shelf can host DTs containing up to 144 DS0s.
  • Page 86 Inven — (inventory) column specifies whether the channel unit provides a valid COMMON LANGUAGE CLEI code for the RTRV-EQPT command. A complete list of services is provided in document 363-208-000, SLC-2000 Access System, Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide (APOG). 2-33...
  • Page 87 363-208-001 Product Description DT Server The DT Server plugs into channel unit slots in the MDS assembly. The DT Server provides the interface function between the MSDT or DDM-2000 FiberReach narrowband shelf (NBS) and the host digital terminal (HDT). The valid DT Server slots in the MDS assembly for Software Release 4.0 to 4.4 are 1, 3, 5, 7, 13, 15, 17, and 19.
  • Page 88 363-208-001 Product Description ® Table 2-2. -2000 Access System Channel Units Code Description Data Sheet Terminal #Ch Range Rel. Inven. Nonprovisionable ® 300( ) POTS CS + OHT/ CLASS 363-005-380 COT/RT/ — LSAS MSDT/NBS SPQ 318 Quad Coin CS 363-005-330 —...
  • Page 89 † In Release 4.4 or earlier, the SPQ 494 is recent change provisionable from the LDS. It is not provisionable from the SLC -2000 CIT. In Release 4.5 or later, the SPQ 494 can be provisioned from the CIT. ‡ Lucent Technologies recommends the use of Software Release 4.2 or later if you are equipping more than 200 ISDN lines.
  • Page 90 363-208-001 Product Description ® Table 2-2. -2000 Access System Channel Units (Continued) Code Description Data Sheet Terminal Range Rel. Inven. Nonprovisionable AUA31 POTS CS 363-005-101 — AUA32 POTS/ SPOTS CU CS 363-005-102 COT/RT/MSDT 2 — AUA33( ) Coin CS 363-005-103 —...
  • Page 91 363-208-001 Product Description ® Table 2-2. -2000 Access System Channel Units (Continued) Code Description Data Sheet Terminal Range Rel. Inven. Nonprovisionable AUA59 SPOTS CU CF +OHT/ 363-005-119 RT/MSDT / 1500Ω/CSA CLASS AUA90 ISDN T-BRITE 363-005-129 COT/RT/ 1 km MSDT/NBS AUA94( ) ISDN Dual ANSI-U 363-005-135 RT/MSDT/...
  • Page 92 363-208-001 Product Description ® Table 2-2. -2000 Access System Channel Units (Continued) Code Description Data Sheet Terminal Range Rel. Inven. Manually Provisionable AUA45(B) Dual Ringing Repeater 363-005-123 COT/RT/ 10 dB (Manual Ring) MSDT/NBS 750 Ω (CSA) AUA56B Dual DID (DPT) 363-005-115 RT/MSDT/ AUA57...
  • Page 93 363-208-001 Product Description ® Table 2-2. -2000 Access System Channel Units (Continued) Code Description Data Sheet Terminal Range Rel. Inven. Manually Provisionable † ‡ -5205 Metallic Channel Unit TLGD5205 COT/RT/ (Tollgrade) MSDT/NBS † ‡ MCU -5405 Digital Bypass Pair TLGD5405 COT/RT (Tollgrade) §...
  • Page 94 363-208-001 Product Description ® Table 2-2. -2000 Access System Channel Units (Continued) Code Description Data Sheet Terminal Range Rel. Inven. Electronically Provisionable SPQ 454 4-Wire E&M/PLR 363-005-386 COT/RT 500Ω SPQ 456 Quad DID 363-005-343 RT/MSDT/ 750Ω (CSA) 4.2 AUA34 DS0 Dataport 363-005-104 —...
  • Page 95 363-208-001 Product Description ® Table 2-2. -2000 Access System Channel Units (Continued) Code Description Data Sheet Terminal Range Rel. Inven. Electronically Provisionable AUA54( ) 4-Wire VF Types I & II 363-005-113 MSDT/NBS 500Ω E&M/PLR AUA93 ISDN BRITE II ANSI-U 363-005-131 RT/MSDT / AUA141 4-Wire VF CF (GTE)
  • Page 96 363-208-001 Product Description High Density Optics Shelf (HDOS) The high density optics shelf (HDOS) (Figure 2-14) is used in FITL applications. The HDOS contains optical units (OUs) that provide the interface between the electrical signals on the MDS assembly backplane and the optical fiber that serves as the link between the HDT and MSDT.
  • Page 97 363-208-001 Product Description AYB1B AYB1B AYB1B AYB1B AYB2 SH 1 1 AMP FUSES SAN-0 AX1-1A High Density Optics Shelf AYB1B AYB1B AYB1B AYB1B AYB2 AYB1B AYB1B AYB1B AYB1B AYB2 AYB1B AYB1B AYB1B AYB1B AYB2 AYB1B AYB1B AYB1B AYB1B AYB2 AYB1B AYB1B AYB1B AYB1B...
  • Page 98 363-208-001 Product Description Fan Unit The 4-type fan unit (Figure 2-15) (Data Sheet 363-005-370) is required with the SLC -2000 Access System RT/HDT. It provides ventilation for the systems and equipment in the frame or cabinet. Look through here to see red, yellow, and green LED indicators.
  • Page 99 363-208-001 Product Description Software Release Compatibility and ARM Shelf Common Unit Configurations Software Release Compatibility Table 2-3 shows the compatibility between the SLC -2000 software releases and the SONET releases (DDM-2000), ITH package releases, and local digital switch (LDS) type interface generics. ARM Shelf Common Unit Configurations Point-to-Point Applications TR-08 and TR-303 Interface...

  • Page 100: -2000 Access System Software Package Compatibilities

    363-208-001 Product Description ® Table 2-3. -2000 Access System Software Package Compatibilities TR-303 Integrated Applications - Switch ® -2000 SONET Releases Generics (Note) Access † ‡ § System 5ESS ® DMS-100 EWSD GTD-5 DDM-2000 Release OC-3 OC-12 Package Switch Switch Switch Switch FiberReach...
  • Page 101 363-208-001 Product Description ® Table 2-3. -2000 Access System Software Package Compatibilities (Continued) TR-303 Integrated Applications - Switch ® -2000 SONET Releases Generics (Note) Access † ‡ § System 5ESS ® DMS-100 EWSD GTD-5 DDM-2000 Release OC-3 OC-12 Package Switch Switch Switch Switch...
  • Page 102 363-208-001 Product Description DS1 Low-Speed Interface The ARM shelf common units required for point-to-point SONET feeder applications with a DS1 low-speed interface are listed below: SMU — BBF261 PDC — BBF240 [Releases 3.1, 3.2, and 3.3 (COT only)] or BBF241 (Release 4.0 and later) LAN (optional at the RT) —...
  • Page 103 363-208-001 Product Description VT1.5 The ARM shelf common units required for linear VT1.5 drop applications are listed below: SMU — BBF261 PDC — BBF240 [Releases 3.1, 3.2, and 3.3 (COT only)] or BBF241 (Release 4.0 and later) LAN (optional at the RT) — BBF250 SYSCTL —...
  • Page 104 363-208-001 Product Description Metallic DS1 Feeder RT and COT The ARM shelf common units required for metallic DS1 feeder RT and COT applications are listed below: SMU — BBF261 PDC — BBF240 [Releases 3.1, 3.2, and 3.3 (COT only)] or BBF241 (Release 4.0 and later) LAN (optional at the RT) —...
  • Page 105 363-208-001 Product Description Integral Test Head (ITH) Configurations The ITH subsystem is an optional part of the SLC -2000 Access System that allows direct test access by the mechanized loop testing (MLT) system using a dial-up link to the ITH or local test access or both. The ITH circuit packs are installed in the ARM shelf.
  • Page 106 363-208-001 Product Description MDS Assembly Common/Channel Unit Configurations The following MDS assembly common units are required for a TR-08 or TR-303 interface: BDJ 240 MDC BDJ 200 PTU BDJ 205 T8U (not required for TR-303 applications). The MDS assembly channel units are listed in Table 2-2. COT Cable Assemblies The COT bay is precabled and shipped with the shelves already mounted.
  • Page 107 363-208-001 Product Description Ringing generators clock alarms J116 P116 Other J115 ED-7C723-36, G5 ED-7C723-36, G6 SLC 5/ SLC -2000 ED-7C723-35, G9 bays J115 P115 1A ATU ED-7C723-37, G16, 17, or 18 MDF test pairs P120 J120 P109 J109 P115 J109 PGTC not used ED-7C723-36, G4...

  • Page 108: Rt/Hdt Bay Cable Assembly - Bay Cables

    363-208-001 Product Description To RT alarms ED-7C723-35, G8 Ringing Indicates bay cables Power inputs J304 inputs P304 ED-7C723-34, G3 4B fan unit P114 J114 P114 J114 DS1 optional ARM shelf danglers P165 P165 J165 J165 DS1 to ED-7C723-30, G13 customer P166 P166 J166...

  • Page 109: Rt/Hdt Bay Cable Assembly - Standard Shelf Danglers

    363-208-001 Product Description To RT alarms ED-7C723-35, G8 Ringing Indicates standard shelf danglers Power inputs J304 inputs P304 ED-7C723-34, G3 4B fan unit P114 J114 P114 J114 DS1 optional ARM shelf danglers P165 P165 J165 J165 DS1 to ED-7C723-30, G13 customer P166 P166...

  • Page 110: Rt/Hdt Bay Cable Assembly - Optional Shelf Danglers

    363-208-001 Product Description To RT alarms Indicates optional shelf danglers ED-7C723-35, G8 Ringing Power inputs J304 inputs P304 ED-7C723-34, G3 4B fan unit P114 J114 P114 J114 DS1 optional ARM shelf danglers P165 P165 J165 J165 DS1 to ED-7C723-30, G13 customer P166 P166...

  • Page 111: Rt/Hdt Bay Cable Assembly - Backplane Or Intrashelf Connections

    363-208-001 Product Description To RT alarms Indicates backplane or intrashelf connections ED-7C723-35, G8 Ringing Power inputs J304 inputs P304 ED-7C723-34, G3 4B fan unit P114 J114 P114 J114 DS1 optional ARM shelf danglers P165 J165 P165 J165 DS1 to ED-7C723-30, G13 customer P166 P166...

  • Page 112: Rt/Hdt Bay Cable Assembly - Customer Interface

    363-208-001 Product Description To RT alarms Indicates customer interface ED-7C723-35, G8 Ringing Power inputs J304 inputs P304 ED-7C723-34, G3 4B fan unit P114 J114 P114 J114 DS1 optional ARM shelf danglers P165 P165 J165 J165 DS1 to ED-7C723-30, G13 customer P166 P166 J166...
  • Page 113 363-208-001 Product Description Figure 2-22. MDS/DSX-1 Cabling Connections 2-60 Issue 9 April 1998...
  • Page 114 363-208-001 Product Description Figure 2-23. DSX-1 Panel Cabling Connections 2-61 Issue 9 April 1998...
  • Page 115 Operations Interfaces Contents Introduction Craft Interface Terminal (CIT) User Interface Panel (UIP) Maintenance Section Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Ground Jack CIT Connector Power Test Points Power Fuses Digital Data System (DDS) Clock Maintenance Jacks Display and Control Section Alarm and Status Indicators Alphanumeric Message Display (AMD) Display and Control Push Buttons Equipment Indicators...
  • Page 116 Contents Parallel Telemetry 3-13 Miscellaneous Discrete Environmental Alarms and Controls (User-Definable) 3-16 SONET Feeder Configuration 3-16 DS1 Feeder Configurations 3-20 Other Alarms 3-21 Order Wire 3-21 Circuit Maintenance 3-22 Circuit Testing (POTS) 3-22 Circuit Testing (Special Services) 3-24 Local Test Access 3-24 3-ii Issue 9...
  • Page 117 Operations Interfaces Introduction This chapter describes the operations interfaces that support technicians and provisioning access to the SLC ® -2000 Access System. These interfaces also allow the system to report alarms and status information. There are differences in the synchronous optical network (SONET) and digital signal level one (DS1) interfaces that will be pointed out in detail later in this chapter.

  • Page 118: Operations Interfaces

    "Link to Alarms and Networks (LAN)" in the "Product Description" chapter. For more details on the CIT, refer to the "Ordering" chapter in document 363-208-000, SLC-2000 Access System, Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide . Registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

  • Page 119: User Interface Panel (Uip) - Maintenance Section

    For safety, a flip-down panel (with a push-to-release latch) covers the jacks and fuses in the maintenance section. For more details on the UIP, see document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages .
  • Page 120 Power fuses are provided on the UIP to protect the UIP and CIT electronics and to fuse the redundant −48 V DC power feeders for the access resource manager (ARM) shelf (see document 363-208-000, SLC-2000 Access System, Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide , for more details).

  • Page 121: User Interface Panel (Uip) - Display And Control Section

    363-208-001 Operations Interfaces Display and Control Section The display section of the UIP (Figure 3-2) contains alarm and status indicators, an alphanumeric display, and push buttons to control the system and the display. The command entry push buttons are coordinated with the display to allow the technician to perform basic operations that otherwise would require a CIT.
  • Page 122 363-208-001 Operations Interfaces Alarm and Status Indicators The UIP contains the following light-emitting diode (LED) indicators. Power (Green) — Incoming − 48 V DC is present at the UIP. Attention (Yellow) — The alphanumeric display has new fault or alarm messages to be reviewed.
  • Page 123 363-208-001 Operations Interfaces Alphanumeric Message Display (AMD) The AMD is a 5- by 7-inch window to the 24-character, single-line, red dot matrix LED. The AMD shows one line at a time of the main menu (of basic system commands) and of system alarm and status reports, without a CIT. NOTE: The UIP does not display new alarms or faults while CIT commands are in progress.
  • Page 124 363-208-001 Operations Interfaces Equipment Indicators Fault Indicators Each circuit pack in the ARM shelf contains a red FAULT indicator LED. All common circuit packs in the MDS assembly also contain red FAULT indicators. Channel units and retainer cards do not contain these LEDs. The FAULT indicator on the circuit pack operates in the following modes: LED Off.
  • Page 125 363-208-001 Operations Interfaces The low-speed and quad low-speed circuit packs do not contain a green ACTIVE LED to indicate they are carrying service. However, you can normally determine the status of the pack without using the CIT as follows: If ... Then ...
  • Page 126 363-208-001 Operations Interfaces Alarm Cutoff (ACO) Function You can silence the audible office alarms at the COT or the DDM-2000 in the CO by pressing the ACO push button at any system at that site within the same subnetwork. The ACO push button does not extinguish visual alarms. NOTE: The SYSCTL and the OHCTL circuit packs (SONET subsystem) must be installed and working for the ACO to operate properly.
  • Page 127 9,600 baud 19,200 baud. Lucent Technologies recommends a baud rate of at least 9,600 for alarm interfaces. This port is supported on SLC -2000 COTs in either SONET or DS1 feeder configurations and on SLC -2000 RTs in a DS1 feeder configuration. The...
  • Page 128 Provisioning Messages: TR-NWT-000199, Issue 2; and TA-NWT-000199, Issue 6, Supplement 1. Document 824-102-149, SLC-2000 Access System Operations Systems Engineering Guide, provides the full list of supported messages along with detailed information about the input and output parameters for these messages. It also provides detailed specifications for the X.25 interface.
  • Page 129 363-208-001 Operations Interfaces The CO/RT selector switch on the SYSCTL pack determines the type of display used for each shelf. An option switch on the SYSCTL pack can enable or disable the sending and receiving of TBOS information over the data communications channel (DCC).
  • Page 130 363-208-001 Operations Interfaces To provide a single point of access for office wiring, you can wire the telemetry outputs of multiple shelves together. This provides a physical ORing of the outputs for the shelves. Since the parallel telemetry alarm closures reflect the office alarms, the SONET subsystem alarm hold-off delay and alarm clear delay set for office alarms also apply to the parallel telemetry.
  • Page 131 363-208-001 Operations Interfaces — Bank (BNK) Statuses. These eight bank status closures identify which shelf is in an alarm state. — Shelf (SHLF) Statuses. These four shelf status closures indicate which TR8 digroup (a digroup pertains to a shelf in a SLC -96 carrier system and contains 24 lines) is in an alarm condition.
  • Page 132 363-208-001 Operations Interfaces Miscellaneous Discrete Environmental Alarms and Controls (User-Definable) The SLC -2000 system provides a set of user-definable miscellaneous discrete environmental alarms and controls to allow monitoring and control of collocated equipment at a remote site. It includes alarms and controls for both: SONET feeder configuration DS1 feeder configuration.
  • Page 133 363-208-001 Operations Interfaces In multispan applications (for example, STS-1 drop and hubbing), the control points operated through the parallel telemetry interface at the SLC -2000 or DDM-2000 OC-3 in the CO are "broadcast" to all remote terminals connected to the system in the CO. In multispan applications, the miscellaneous discrete environmental alarm and status points from all remote terminals connected to one SLC -2000 system or DDM-2000 OC-3 in the CO are "ORed"...

  • Page 134: Miscellaneous Discrete Environmental Alarms And Controls (Tbos Or Tl1/X.25 At Central Office)

    363-208-001 Operations Interfaces Remote Terminal Central Office Misc. Alarm/Status Inputs Misc Alarm/Status Outputs Input Common Open Door, High Temp, To Discrete High Water, Telemetry Fire, Equipment etc. External Minor -48 V From SLC Alarm Input (#15) Series 5 (External Minor) Power Shelf Power Minor TBOS or...

  • Page 135: Miscellaneous Discrete Environmental Alarms And Controls (Parallel Telemetry At Central Office)

    363-208-001 Operations Interfaces Remote Terminal Central Office Misc. Alarm/Status Inputs Misc Alarm/Status Outputs Input Common Open Door, High Temp, To Discrete High Water, Telemetry Fire, Equipment etc. External Minor -48 V From SLC Alarm Input (#15) Series 5 (External Minor) Power Shelf Parallel Telemetry Power Minor...
  • Page 136 363-208-001 Operations Interfaces DS1 Feeder Configurations In SLC -2000 RTs with DS1 feeder, a maximum of seven of the miscellaneous discrete alarm/status points may be used. The control inputs and outputs are not supported. Each miscellaneous discrete input is mapped to the TR8 data link of a VRT.
  • Page 137 363-208-001 Operations Interfaces Other Alarms The SLC -2000 RT provides the following alarms in addition to the miscellaneous discrete inputs: Power Minor (PMN): This alarm detects the loss of alternating current (AC) power at the RT. An alarm output is provided over the parallel telemetry and TBOS interfaces in the CO (using the SLC -2000 COT or CO DDM-2000).
  • Page 138 363-208-001 Operations Interfaces Circuit Maintenance This section describes how the SLC -2000 system supports the following circuit maintenance features: Plain old telephone service (POTS) circuit testing Special services testing Local test access. Depending on your application, the SLC -2000 system integral test head (ITH) may be required to support circuit maintenance.
  • Page 139 ITH link does not have any checkerboard (nonstandard) cross-connections to it (see document 363-208-000, SLC-2000 Access System, Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide , for an explanation of cross-connections). In other words, the logical line to physical line cross-connection must be a standard DS0 cross-connection.
  • Page 140 CIT commands (CONN-TACC and DISC-TACC) are used to establish and disconnect test access. You can use the CONN-TAP command to loop around the test access path on an MDS. See document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for more details.

  • Page 141: Operations And Maintenance Procedures (Top)

    Operations and Maintenance Procedures (TOP) Contents Introduction How to Use Task-Oriented Practice (TOP) Procedures Safety Labels and Notes UIP and CIT Input Command Conventions Equipment and User Considerations Lightwave Safety Circuit Pack Installation Tools Cabling, Wiring, Assembly, and Application Schematic Diagrams Turnup Philosophy Before You Start 4-10...

  • Page 142: Numerical List Of Top Procedures

    Contents DS1 Cross-Connect Philosophy 4-13 TR-08 Standard Cross-Connections 4-13 TR-303 Cross-Connections 4-13 Integrated Network Access (INA) Cross-Connections 4-14 Fiber in the Loop (FITL) Turnup 4-14 Numerical List of TOP Procedures 4-16 4-ii Issue 9 April 1998...
  • Page 143 Operations and Maintenance Procedures (TOP) Introduction WARNING: Only trained service personnel should perform the procedures in this document. These procedures allow exposure to high electrical energy and/or current that may result in electric shock and/or injury to untrained personnel during servicing, maintenance, and installation of this system. This chapter contains task-oriented practice (TOP) procedures to accept, equip, ®...
  • Page 144 363-208-001 Operations and Maintenance Procedures (TOP) NOTE: The turnup procedures do not include power or ringing equipment. Refer to the vendor's documentation for procedures on turning up the power and ringing equipment. NOTE: A craft interface terminal (CIT) is required when turning up the SONET subsystem to clear alarms associated with installing the ARM shelf circuit packs and to turn up a Release 3.1 and later system.
  • Page 145 363-208-001 Operations and Maintenance Procedures (TOP) NOTE: Before removing or installing any circuit packs in a subsystem, make sure that the following control circuit packs are installed and working: SONET subsystem — System controller (SYSCTL) and overhead controller (OHCTL) circuit packs DLC subsystem —...
  • Page 146 363-208-001 Operations and Maintenance Procedures (TOP) How to Use Task-Oriented Practice (TOP) Procedures The procedures in this chapter are grouped into three basic types of activities (nontrouble procedures, trouble analysis description/procedures, and detailed level procedures) done at the SLC -2000 Access System RT. The top outside page heading indicates the type of procedure.
  • Page 147 IXL-001 or TAP-102 to clear the trouble. If you need assistance after completing all the applicable procedures in this chapter, call the Lucent Technologies Regional Technical Assistance Center (RTAC). The telephone number is 1-800-225-RTAC.
  • Page 148 363-208-001 Operations and Maintenance Procedures (TOP) Safety Labels and Notes Safety labels in TOP procedures have the following definitions. DANGER: This indicates the presence of a hazard that will cause death or severe personal injury if the hazard is not avoided. WARNING: This indicates the presence of a hazard that can cause death or severe personal injury if the hazard is not avoided.
  • Page 149 CAUTION: An electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist strap, with a resistance between 250 K and 1.5 M ohms, should be worn when handling SLC-2000 Access System circuit packs to prevent possible damage to the circuit packs. Before using the wrist strap, check it for shorts, opens, and proper resistance value.
  • Page 150 363-208-001 Operations and Maintenance Procedures (TOP) Circuit Pack Installation CAUTION: Take care to avoid damaging the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) that protrude through the openings in the faceplate of the circuit packs during handling and circuit pack installation. When replacing circuit packs, replace only one circuit pack at a time and wait for transient alarms to stabilize.
  • Page 151 Optical power loss meter (optional) Loop and DS1 3B-type protectors. Use local procedures to obtain these tools and equipment. Refer to document 363-208-000, SLC-2000 Access System, Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide (APOG), for ordering information. Cabling, Wiring, Assembly, and Application Schematic Diagrams...
  • Page 152 The ARM shelf also provides support for DS1 services, the DLC subsystem, and an optional integrated test head (ITH) subsystem. The ITH subsystem provides channel testing capabilities. Refer to document 363-208-000, SLC-2000 Access System Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide , for specific information relating to the configurations that support the ITH subsystem.
  • Page 153 MDS assembly. Preservice Tests (Looped Back) Lucent Technologies recommends that the ARM shelf be tested while in the preservice (looped back) state. These tests verify that the function groups can be equipped with the appropriate circuit packs and pass diagnostic tests. Mode 1 MDS assemblies may be tested while the SONET subsystem is in the preservice state.

  • Page 154: Ds1 Line Coding And Format

    363-208-001 Operations and Maintenance Procedures (TOP) Turnup Summary The SLC -2000 Access System services are built on a SONET or metallic feeder subsystem foundation. To turn up services you must perform the following steps: Step Procedure Install fuses. Install the user interface panel support circuit packs. Install and test the SONET or metallic feeder subsystem circuit packs and establish an end-to-end SONET or metallic feeder network.

  • Page 155: Vtu/Liu Slot To Mds Standard Ds1 System Map (Tr-08)

    363-208-001 Operations and Maintenance Procedures (TOP) DS1 Cross-Connect Philosophy TR-08 Standard Cross-Connections Table 4-2 shows the virtual tributary unit/line interface unit (VTU/LIU) slot to MDS standard DS1 system map for TR-08. Table 4-2. VTU/LIU Slot to MDS Standard DS1 System Map (TR-08) DLC System (Note) VTU/LIU Slot MDS Assembly Mode 1 Shelf Mode 2 Shelf...

  • Page 156: Vtu/Liu And Corresponding Ina System

    363-208-001 Operations and Maintenance Procedures (TOP) Integrated Network Access (INA) Cross-Connections Table 4-3 shows the VTU/LIU feeder relationship for INA systems. Table 4-3. VTU/LIU and Corresponding INA System DS1/INA Feeder VTU/LIU Slot DS1 LED Physical DS1 Port 1 through 4 1 through 4 a-1-1 through 4 5 through 8...
  • Page 157 Operations and Maintenance Procedures (TOP) The SLC -2000 Multi-Services Distant Terminal (MSDT) is turned up using procedures in document 363-205-004, SLC-2000 Multi-Services Distant Terminal (MSDT) feature, User/Service Manual . The DDM-2000 FiberReach NBS is turned up using procedures in document 363-206-301, DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer, Wideband/Narrowband Shelf, User/Service Manual .
  • Page 158 363-208-001 Operations and Maintenance Procedures (TOP) Numerical List of TOP Procedures The numerical list of TOP procedures (Table 4-4) lists all procedures (elements) that are present in this issue. This information should not be used for direct access to a particular element because most elements are not stand-alone procedures .
  • Page 159 363-208-001 Operations and Maintenance Procedures (TOP) Table 4-5. Numerical List of TOP Procedures (Continued) Element Title ARM Shelf Turnup Tab Index (Continued) NTP-012 Equip SLC -2000 Bandwidth Management Complex Circuit Packs (Release 3.1, 3.2, or 3.3) Equip SLC -2000 Integral Test Head Circuit Packs (Optional) NTP-013 NTP-014 Preservice ARM Shelf Turnup Tests (VTU/DS1 Unit Installation with...
  • Page 160 363-208-001 Operations and Maintenance Procedures (TOP) Table 4-5. Numerical List of TOP Procedures (Continued) Element Title MDS Assembly Turnup Tab Index (Continued) NTP-041 Equip an MDS Assembly NTP-042 Establish End-to-End DLC System with a SLC 96 COT or Integrated into a TR-08 or TR-303 Digital Switch Establish End-to-End DLC System for SLC -2000 COT with a SLC -2000 NTP-043...
  • Page 161 363-208-001 Operations and Maintenance Procedures (TOP) Table 4-5. Numerical List of TOP Procedures (Continued) Element Title Circuit Order Tab Index (Continued) NTP-077 Upgrade SONET Subsystem OC-3 Ring Network to OC-12 Ring Network Using OC-3 Shelves In Service Add DS1 Service to an In-Service SLC NTP-078 ®...
  • Page 162 363-208-001 Operations and Maintenance Procedures (TOP) Table 4-5. Numerical List of TOP Procedures (Continued) Element Title Detailed Level Procedures Tab Index Contents Contents of This Tab DLP-500 Perform Commands from the User Interface Panel DLP-501 Install OHCTL Circuit Pack DLP-502 Install or Replace BBG5 SYSCTL DLP-503 Install TGS Circuit Packs...
  • Page 163 363-208-001 Operations and Maintenance Procedures (TOP) Table 4-5. Numerical List of TOP Procedures (Continued) Element Title Detailed Level Procedures Tab Index (Continued) DLP-531 Test Individual DS1 Circuits During Turnup DLP-532 Verify That Alarms Will Activate During MDS Assembly Turnup DLP-533 Perform Channel Tests During MDS Assembly Turnup DLP-534 Install or Replace BBG8 SYSCTL...
  • Page 164 363-208-001 Operations and Maintenance Procedures (TOP) Table 4-5. Numerical List of TOP Procedures (Continued) Element Title Channel Unit Installation Tab Index (Continued) DLP-605 Test Multiparty (2-Party ANI) Channel COT-to-RT on Universal SLC Carrier System DLP-606 Test FSR Channel Test DID Channel at SLC -2000 RT DLP-607 Test AUA45( ) Manual Ringdown Channel at SLC -2000 RT DLP-608...
  • Page 165 363-208-001 Overall: IXL-001 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 1 Overall Task Index List FIND YOUR JOB IN THE LIST BELOW . THEN GO TO ® Accept SLC -2000 Access System ......IXL-002 ®...

  • Page 166: Accept Slc -2000 Access System

    363-208-001 Overall: IXL-002 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 1 Accept SLC ® -2000 Access System FIND YOUR JOB IN THE LIST BELOW . THEN GO TO To accept the SLC -2000 Access System, perform the following procedures in the order shown.

  • Page 167: Turn Up Slc

    363-208-001 Overall: IXL-003 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Turn Up SLC ® -2000 Access System with Metallic Feeder — Release 3.1, 3.2, or 3.3 FIND YOUR JOB IN THE LIST BELOW . THEN GO TO To turn up a SLC -2000 Access System with metallic feeder using Software Release 3.1, 3.2, or 3.3, perform the following procedures in the order shown.

  • Page 168: Configuration

    IXL-003: Overall 363-208-001 Page 2 of 2 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Perform one of the following procedures according to your system configuration: • Establish End-to-End DLC System with a SLC 96 COT or NTP-042 Integrated into a TR-08 or a TR-303 Digital Switch •...

  • Page 169: Turn Up Slc

    363-208-001 Overall: IXL-004 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Turn Up SLC ® -2000 Access System with Metallic Feeder — Release 4.0 or Later FIND YOUR JOB IN THE LIST BELOW . THEN GO TO To turn up a SLC -2000 Access System with metallic feeder using Software Release 4.0 or later, perform the following procedures in the order shown.

  • Page 170: Configuration

    IXL-004: Overall 363-208-001 Page 2 of 2 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Install MDS Support Circuit Packs in ARM Shelf NTP-040 Equip an MDS Assembly NTP-041 Perform one of the following procedures according to your system configuration: •...
  • Page 171 363-208-001 Overall: IXL-005 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Turn Up a SLC ® -2000 Access System with SONET Feeder — Release 3.1, 3.2, or 3.3 FIND YOUR JOB IN THE LIST BELOW . THEN GO TO To turn up a SLC -2000 Access System with SONET feeder using Software Release 3.1, 3.2, or 3.3, perform the following procedures in the order shown.
  • Page 172 IXL-005: Overall 363-208-001 Page 2 of 2 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Install MDS Support Circuit Packs in ARM Shelf NTP-040 Equip an MDS Assembly NTP-041 Perform one of the following procedures according to your system configuration: •...
  • Page 173 363-208-001 Overall: IXL-006 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Turn Up a SLC ® -2000 Access System with SONET Feeder — Release 4.0 or Later FIND YOUR JOB IN THE LIST BELOW . THEN GO TO To turn up a SLC -2000 Access System with SONET feeder using Software Release 4.0 or later, perform the following procedures in the order shown.
  • Page 174 IXL-006: Overall 363-208-001 Page 2 of 2 Issue 9, April 1998 FIND YOUR JOB IN THE LIST BELOW THEN GO TO Equip an MDS Assembly NTP-041 Perform one of the following procedures according to your system configuration: • Establish End-to-End DLC System with a SLC 96 COT or NTP-042 Integrated into a TR-08 or a TR-303 Digital Switch •...

  • Page 175: Perform Trouble-Clearing Procedures

    363-208-001 Overall: IXL-007 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Perform Trouble-Clearing Procedures DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO ® These procedures allow you to clear troubles on the SLC -2000 system. Except where noted, you can find these procedures behind the Trouble Clearing tab.
  • Page 176 IXL-007: Overall 363-208-001 Page 2 of 2 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Clear Trouble During Program Upgrade ......TAP-108 ®...

  • Page 177: Establish Ds1 Services For Sonet

    363-208-001 Overall: IXL-008 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Perform Circuit Order Tasks DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO These procedures allow you to upgrade or delete service on an in-service system. Except where noted, you can find these procedures behind the Circuit Order tab.
  • Page 178 IXL-008: Overall 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Convert a Point-to-Point System to a Ring System ....NTP-064 ®...
  • Page 179 363-208-001 Overall: IXL-008 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO The following procedures are located behind the Detailed Level Procedures tab: Change Site ID, Network Element Address, Target Identification (TID), or TBOS Display Number .

  • Page 180: Install Channel Units

    363-208-001 Overall: IXL-009 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Install Channel Units DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO These procedures give specific steps for provisioning, installing, and testing individual channel units in the MDS assembly. Except where noted, you can find these procedures behind the Channel Unit Installation tab.
  • Page 181 IXL-009: Overall 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Provision Channel Units ......... . . DLP-601 ®...
  • Page 182 363-208-001 Overall: IXL-009 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Install AUA94 and/or SPQ 494 Channel Units in FiberReach NBS ..DLP-617 The following procedure can be found behind the Detailed Level Procedures tab.
  • Page 183 363-208-001 Accept: Introduction-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 6 General This tab provides procedures to accept the SLC ® -2000 Access System digital loop carrier (DLC) access resource manager (ARM) shelf (see Figure 1), Metallic Distribution Shelf (MDS) assemblies (see Figures 2 through 5), and High Density Optics Shelf (HDOS) assemblies (see Figure 6).
  • Page 184 Introduction-000: Accept 363-208-001 Page 2 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 Channel units Channel units Common units 25-36 37-48 Metallic Distrib ution Shelf BDJ200 BDJ240 BDJ240 BDJ200 BDJ200 BDJ240 BDJ240 BDJ200 Channel units Channel units Common units 1-12 13-24 Note: The configur ation shown is for Softw are Release 4.0 and later...
  • Page 185 363-208-001 Accept: Introduction-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 6 Side 1 Shelf 2 Side 2 Shelf 2 DT Ser ers DT Servers Common units 1,3,5,7 13,15,17,19 Metallic Distribution Shelf SPQ808 SPQ808 SPQ808 SPQ808 SPQ808 SPQ808 SPQ808 SPQ808 FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL...
  • Page 186 Introduction-000: Accept 363-208-001 Page 4 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 Side 1 Shelf 2 Side 2 Shelf 2 DT Servers DT Servers Common units 1,3,5,7,9 13,15,17,19,21 Metallic Distribution Shelf SPQ810 SPQ810 SPQ810 SPQ810 SPQ810 SPQ810 SPQ810 SPQ810 SPQ810 SPQ810 FAIL FAIL FAIL...
  • Page 187 363-208-001 Accept: Introduction-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 6 Side 1 Shelf 2 Side 2 Shelf 2 DT Servers DT Servers Common units 1,3,5,7,9,11† 13,15,17,19,21,23† Metallic Distribution Shelf SPQ811 SPQ811 SPQ811 SPQ811 SPQ811 SPQ811 SPQ811 SPQ811 SPQ811 SPQ811 SPQ811 SPQ811 FAIL...
  • Page 188 Introduction-000: Accept 363-208-001 Page 6 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 AYB1B AYB1B AYB1B AYB1B AYB2 SH 1 1 AMP FUSES SAN-0 AX1-1A High Density Optics Shelf AYB1B AYB1B AYB1B AYB1B AYB2 AYB1B AYB1B AYB1B AYB1B AYB2 AYB1B AYB1B AYB1B AYB1B AYB2 AYB1B...
  • Page 189 363-208-001 Accept: Contents-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 1 Contents of This Tab CAUTION: Take care to avoid damaging the LEDs that protrude through the openings in the faceplate of the circuit packs during handling and circuit pack installation. CAUTION: When handling circuit packs, always wear an electrostatic discharge wrist strap connected to an ESD ground jack on the user interface...
  • Page 190 363-208-001 Accept: NTP-002 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 6 Accept SLC -2000 Access System ® DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Determine whether the system you are accepting is cabinet mounted or frame mounted.
  • Page 191 NTP-002: Accept 363-208-001 Page 2 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 216-Tool Hex Key Figure 1 – Opening a Typical Cabinet with Hex Key and 216-Type Tool On the inside of the side 1 left door, there is an AC wiring diagram with a table for circuit breaker code.
  • Page 192 363-208-001 Accept: NTP-002 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 6 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Set the MAIN circuit breaker in the transfer/breaker panel to OFF. With the MAIN circuit breaker off, determine that AC power into cabinet is correctly terminated on the MAIN circuit breaker by ensuring that AC voltage is not present on the AC convenience outlet(s) in the cabinet.
  • Page 193 NTP-002: Accept 363-208-001 Page 4 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 10. Determine if plug-ins and fuses have been installed in the access resource manager (ARM) shelf, metallic distribution shelf (MDS) assemblies (if present), and high density optics shelf (HDOS) assemblies (if present).
  • Page 194 363-208-001 Accept: NTP-002 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 6 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 13. Verify that there are no broken, bent, or misaligned contacts on front of the connectors. Resolve problems through local procedures.

  • Page 195: Access System

    J184. STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. Not used Verify that the clock is disabled. NOTE: Refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages (SET-SYNCN), or the appropriate CIT command. STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE.

  • Page 196: Accept And Install Arm Shelf Fuses

    363-208-001 Accept: NTP-003 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 5 Accept and Install ARM Shelf Fuses DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: Before the access resource manager (ARM) shelf can be equipped with ®...
  • Page 197 NTP-003: Accept 363-208-001 Page 2 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Are the proper voltages present? If YES, go to Step 3. If NO, do one of the following depending on your application: If a ...
  • Page 198 363-208-001 Accept: NTP-003 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 5 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Install a SAN-O 10-Amp fuse in −48V(A)/10A fuse holder (behind the cover) on the UIP. NOTE: The Power and Panel Fault LEDs light after the fuse is installed.
  • Page 199 Install a SAN-O 2-Amp fuse in −48V/2A-UIP fuse holder on the UIP. NOTE: The display will print SLC-2000 ACCESS SYSTEM for about 30 seconds and then print MN:NE:pdc unavailable . Minor and NE Activity LEDs will light. The Panel Fault LED goes off.
  • Page 200 363-208-001 Accept: NTP-003 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 5 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Press the LED Test push button and verify all alarm LEDs and display LEDs light. If all alarm and Then ...

  • Page 201: Accept And Install Mds Fuses

    363-208-001 Accept: NTP-004 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 7 Accept and Install MDS Assembly Fuses DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary : Before the metallic distribution shelf (MDS) assembly can be tested, ®...
  • Page 202 NTP-004: Accept 363-208-001 Page 2 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Measure the voltages at each of the following fuse holders by connecting one meter lead to the right fuse holder contact (at the back) and the other lead to −48V RTN jack on the user interface panel (UIP).
  • Page 203 363-208-001 Accept: NTP-004 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 7 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO If voltages are ... Then ... Within limits Continue with Step 4. Not within limits Clear power shelf trouble or intershelf wiring trouble using the appropriate schematic diagram.
  • Page 204 NTP-004: Accept 363-208-001 Page 4 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO If ... Then ... The fuses do not blow Continue with Step 5. Any fuse blows Check power and ringing generator equipment voltages or use schematic diagram to...
  • Page 205 363-208-001 Accept: NTP-004 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 7 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Figure 1 – MDS Assembly Sections Install an SPQ -type quad channel unit in the slot farthest from the center of the MDS assembly in the section chosen.
  • Page 206 NTP-004: Accept 363-208-001 Page 6 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO NOTE: Ignore alarms caused by this test. All you want to do is verify that power is supplied to this shelf side of the MDS assembly.
  • Page 207 363-208-001 Accept: NTP-004 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 7 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 10. Determine which section(s) of the MDS you have tested and choose the next section for testing (Figure 1). If you've tested ...

  • Page 208: Accept And Install Hdos Fuses

    (ARM) shelf and MDS assemblies. NOTE: Refer to document 363-205-004, SLC-2000 MSDT User Service Manual , for more information on the HDOS and FITL distribution. This acceptance procedure simply verifies that fuses can be installed without blowing and that power is supplied to the HDOS assembly.
  • Page 209 NTP-005: Accept 363-208-001 Page 2 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO After measuring the voltage at each holder, verify that the proper voltage is present at each holder (−42 to −56 volts DC). NOTE: Voltages will be about the same as measured at the power and ringing supply equipment.
  • Page 210 363-208-001 Accept: NTP-005 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 6 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO In the plug-in slot group chosen (Figure 1), choose plug-in slots PCU-1 and OU 1 to begin testing. Plug-in Plug-in Plug-in...
  • Page 211 NTP-005: Accept 363-208-001 Page 4 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 10. Does the FAIL LED remain lighted after the PCU is installed? If NO, continue with Step 11. If YES, replace the PCU.
  • Page 212 363-208-001 Accept: NTP-005 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 6 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 16. Is the measured optical power between −21 and −26 dBm? If YES, continue with Step 17. If NO, refer the problem to the installation group.
  • Page 213 NTP-005: Accept 363-208-001 Page 6 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 18. Determine which plug-in slot groups have been tested and choose the next group as follows: If you've tested ...
  • Page 214 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: Introduction-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Introduction General This tab provides procedures to install circuit packs, perform preservice tests, and ® establish end-to-end feeder service subsystem at a SLC -2000 Access System terminal. These procedures deal with the installation of circuit packs in the access resource manager (ARM) shelf.
  • Page 215 Introduction-000: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 2 Issue 9, April 1998 When establishing a ring or linear drop network, first establish all optical spans, then make the necessary STS-1 or VT1 cross-connections before equipping the low-speed slots. When turning up the SONET subsystem looped back, test each group by installing the appropriate circuit packs and performing local tests.
  • Page 216 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup Contents-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Contents of This Tab CAUTION: Take care to avoid damaging the LEDs that protrude through the openings in the faceplate of the circuit packs during handling and circuit pack installation. CAUTION: When handling circuit packs, always wear an electrostatic discharge wrist strap connected to an ESD ground jack on the user interface panel (UIP).
  • Page 217 Contents-000: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 Install Line Interface Unit (LIU) for Metallic Feeders (Release 3.1, 3.2, or 3.3) ............NTP-018 Install User Interface Panel Complex Support Circuit Packs (Release 4.0 or Later) .
  • Page 218 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: Contents-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 Figure 1 – Access Resource Manager Shelf...

  • Page 219: Install User Interface Panel Complex Support Circuit Packs (Release 3.1, 3.2, Or 3.3)

    363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-010 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 6 Install User Interface Panel Complex Support Circuit Packs (Release 3.1, 3.2, or 3.3) DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: Use this procedure to install the UIP complex circuit packs when the system will use Software Release 3.1, 3.2, or 3.3.
  • Page 220 NTP-010: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Install the BBF240 PDC in the PDC slot in the ARM shelf. Verify that the FAULT LED lights then goes off within 1 minute.
  • Page 221 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-010 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 6 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Install the BBF261 SMU in the SMU slot in the ARM shelf. Verify that the FAULT LED goes off within 4 minutes.
  • Page 222 NTP-010: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 4 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Reference: Refer to Circuit Order: NTP-069 for upgrading SMU software. At the UIP, press Escape then the Scroll Menu up or down arrow push button until SET-STATE-SMU <ent>...
  • Page 223 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-010 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 6 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Press the LED Test UIP push button. Verify that the following LEDs light: •...
  • Page 224 NTP-010: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 6 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 12. Install a BBF250 LAN circuit pack in the LAN slot. NOTE: The FAULT LED on the LAN circuit pack lights and then goes off within 1 minute.
  • Page 225 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-011 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 6 Equip SLC ® -2000 SONET OC-3 Subsystem (Looped Back) (Release 3.1, 3.2, or 3.3) DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: This procedure gives the steps for installing the SONET subsystem circuit packs.
  • Page 226 NTP-011: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO CAUTION: Take care to avoid damaging the LEDs that protrude through the openings in the faceplate of the circuit packs during handling and circuit pack installation.
  • Page 227 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-011 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 6 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Set options and install the BBG5 SYSCTL plug-in. DLP-502 NOTE: It may take up to 1 minute for SYSCTL to start initialization. NOTE: See your local company documentation for specific option settings.
  • Page 228 NTP-011: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 4 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Install OLIUs in MAIN 1 and MAIN 2. DLP-504 NOTE: 22F/22F-U/22F2-U OLIUs are required for DS1 taper/drop (partial function group VT1 cross-connections) and ring configurations.
  • Page 229 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-011 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 6 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 14. Disable the DCC channel from the CIT using the following procedure: While accessing the SONET subsystem, enter: set-fecom:dcc-all and press the Enter key At the Communications [CurrentValues] = prompt, enter: ? and select 2 (disabled)
  • Page 230 NTP-011: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 6 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 17. Will the ARM shelf be used for DS1 (Function group C) services? If YES, continue with Step 18.

  • Page 231: Equip Slc ® -2000 Bandwidth Management Complex Circuit Packs (Release 3.1, 3.2, Or 3.3)

    363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-012 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 7 Equip SLC -2000 Bandwidth Management ® Complex Circuit Packs (Release 3.1, 3.2, or 3.3) DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: In this procedure it is assumed that the system is being equipped for TR-08 operation (Release 3.1 or later).
  • Page 232 NTP-012: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO NOTE: If the TSI FAULT LED is flashing (indicating software is being installed from the SMU), you will not see the proper responses until after the software is installed and the FAULT LED stops flashing.
  • Page 233 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-012 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 7 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Did the FAULT LED light and then go off? If NO, continue with Step 9. If YES, go to Step 10.
  • Page 234 NTP-012: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 4 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 13. Do all LEDs light on both TSI circuit packs? If NO, continue with Step 14. If YES, go to Step 15.
  • Page 235 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-012 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 7 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 17. Wait 2 minutes for the system to stabilize, then make CORE (1) the active core as follows: At the UIP, press Escape then the Scroll Menu up or down arrow push button until SWITCH-CORE <ent>...
  • Page 236 NTP-012: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 6 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Then press Enter. When CONFIRM? Y<ent> N<esc> is displayed, press Enter. 21. Do any alarms exist on the system? If YES, continue with Step 22.
  • Page 237 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-012 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 7 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 25. Using the CIT and while accessing the SONET subsystem, execute the command set-ne and proceed as follows: When the system Then enter ...
  • Page 238 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-013 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 6 Equip SLC ® -2000 Integral Test Head Circuit Packs (Optional) DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: In this procedure it is assumed that the system is being equipped with the circuit packs in the integral test head (ITH) subsystem.
  • Page 239 NTP-013: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Do you want to install ITH circuit packs or perform ITH initialization testing (see Note)? If installing ITH circuit packs, continue with Step 2.
  • Page 240 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-013 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 6 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Table A. Required ITH Circuit Packs by Application (TR-08) Local Routine Circuit Pack MLT-2 Test Access SARTS...
  • Page 241 NTP-013: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 4 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Install the needed ITH circuit packs in the following order (see Caution): CAUTION: For the system to properly initialize, you must install the THC circuit pack last.
  • Page 242 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-013 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 6 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO After installing the THC, check the LEDs on the ITH circuit packs and proceed as follows: If the ...
  • Page 243 NTP-013: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 6 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO After performing Step 6, are any FAULT LEDs lighted on any ITH circuit packs? If YES, continue with Step 8.

  • Page 244: Preservice Arm Shelf Turnup Tests (Vtu/Ds1 Unit Installation With System Looped Back) (Release 3.1, 3.2, Or 3.3)

    363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-014 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 4 Preservice ARM Shelf Turnup Tests (VTU/DS1 Unit Installation with System Looped Back) (Release 3.1, 3.2, or 3.3) DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: This procedure gives the steps for installing the VTU and DS1 circuit packs.
  • Page 245 NTP-014: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 4 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Install BBG2 MXRVO plug-ins in Function Group A FUNCTION(A) 1 then FUNCTION(A) 2 slots. NOTE: For FUNCTION(A) 1 slot, the MXRVO FAULT lights for less than 30 seconds and then goes off.
  • Page 246 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-014 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 4 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Does the FAULT LED remain lighted and the UIP RETRIEVE-FAULTS command indicate no software is installing? If YES, continue with Step 9.
  • Page 247 NTP-014: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 4 of 4 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 17. Install DS1/DS1PM circuit packs in DS1(LS-C) slots 1 through P DLP-510 as required.

  • Page 248: Or 3.3)

    363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-015 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 11 Establish End-to-End System ® -2000 OC-3 Optical Fiber Spans (Release 3.1, 3.2, or 3.3) DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO CAUTION: When handling circuit packs, always wear an electrostatic discharge wrist strap connected to an ESD ground jack on the user interface panel (UIP).
  • Page 249 NTP-015: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 11 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Verify that the SLC -2000 RT or COT is looped back and that all MDS assemblies are unequipped before continuing.
  • Page 250 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-015 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 11 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO After changing the option settings and installing the OLIU, press the Update button on the UIP. 10.
  • Page 251 NTP-015: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 4 of 11 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO NOTE: After enabling communications at one end only, the FAULT LED on the OHCTL flashes. If it does not flash, use the rtrv-fecom command to ensure that communications are enabled.
  • Page 252 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-015 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 11 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 19. Set the timing mode as indicated by the work order. Reinstall the DLP-503 circuit packs and press the SYSCTL UPD/INIT button.
  • Page 253 NTP-015: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 6 of 11 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Node 1 Node 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 Ring 1 Ring 2 Node 5...
  • Page 254 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-015 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 11 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 25. At the CIT, enter the rtrv-alm command to look for a problem caused by a duplicated site/ne address, TBOS display, or TID.
  • Page 255 NTP-015: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 8 of 11 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 29. After determining that timing mode options do not need to be changed, reinstall the circuit pack.
  • Page 256 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-015 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 9 of 11 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 33. Do one of the following depending on the OLIU: If span being connected at Then do the following ...
  • Page 257 If YES, then proceed to Step 40. 39. Set the nodes using the set-sync commands. NOTE: Use document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for the correct command format. 40. Install STS-1 or VT1.5 cross-connections per work order.
  • Page 258 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-015 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 11 of 11 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 42. Was the response met? If NO, then continue with Step 43. If YES, then proceed to Step 44. 43.

  • Page 259: Establish Slc -2000 System With Metallic Feeders Interfacing Through Lius (Release 3.1, 3.2, Or 3.3)

    363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-016 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Establish SLC ® -2000 System with Metallic Feeders Interfacing Through LIUs (Release 3.1, 3.2, or 3.3) DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: The following SONET subsystem circuit packs are required for metallic feeder operation: •...
  • Page 260 NTP-016: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO CAUTION: Take care to avoid damaging the LEDs that protrude through the openings in the faceplate of the circuit packs during handling and circuit pack installation.
  • Page 261 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-016 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO At the UIP, press the Scroll Menu up or down arrow button until RETRIEVE-PROG-VRSN<ent>...

  • Page 262: Equip Bandwidth Management Complex Circuit Packs For Slc

    363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-017 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 6 Equip Bandwidth Management Complex ® Circuit Packs for SLC -2000 Systems Configured with Metallic Feeders (Release 3.2 or 3.3) DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: Equipping the bandwidth management complex consists of installing the time slot interchange (TSI) circuit packs.
  • Page 263 NTP-017: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Did the FAULT LED light and then go off and the ACTIVE LED light? If NO, continue with Step 5.
  • Page 264 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-017 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 6 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 11. Initialize the system as follows: At the UIP, press Escape then the Scroll Menu up or down arrow push button until INITIALIZE-SYSTEM <ent>...
  • Page 265 NTP-017: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 4 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO NOTE: TSI ACTIVE LED lights in CORE (2). The MN, Abnormal, and NE Activity LEDs light and the SW-CORE: FORCE->2 done is displayed.
  • Page 266 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-017 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 6 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 18. Use the SWITCH-CORE command and select the RESET option to reset the bandwidth management core protection switching state as follows: Press Escape then the Scroll Menu up or down arrow push button until SWITCH-CORE <ent>...
  • Page 267 NTP-017: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 6 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 23. Wait 5 minutes for data transfer and perform the LED test. DLP-507 24.

  • Page 268: Install Line Interface Unit (Liu) For Metallic Feeders (Release 3.1, 3.2, Or 3.3)

    363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-018 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Install Line Interface Unit (LIU) for Metallic Feeders (Release 3.1, 3.2, or 3.3) DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: This procedure gives the steps for installing the LIUs for metallic feeders in the ARM shelf.
  • Page 269 NTP-018: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO After 2 minutes, does the LIU's FAULT LED remain lighted? If YES, continue with Step 6. If NO, go to Step 7.
  • Page 270 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-018 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 13. Perform an LED test. DLP-507 NOTE: The system is now ready for initial Metallic Distribution Shelf turnup.

  • Page 271: Install User Interface Panel Complex Support Circuit Packs (Release 4.0 Or Later)

    363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-019 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 5 Install User Interface Panel Complex Support Circuit Packs (Release 4.0 or Later) Summary: Use this procedure to install the UIP complex circuit packs when the system uses Software Release 4.0 or later. First, install the PDC circuit pack. Next, install the SMU and verify that the software release of the SMU matches the software release of the PDC.
  • Page 272 NTP-019: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Install the BBF241 PDC in the PDC slot in the ARM shelf. Verify that the FAULT LED lights then goes off within 5 minutes.
  • Page 273 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-019 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 5 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Install the BBF261 SMU in the SMU slot in the ARM shelf. Verify the following: •...
  • Page 274 NTP-019: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 4 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO At the UIP, press Escape then the Scroll Menu up or down arrow push button until SET-STATE-SMU <ent>...
  • Page 275 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-019 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 5 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 10. Do you need to install the LAN circuit pack? If YES, continue with Step 11. If NO, go to Step 15.
  • Page 276 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-020 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 7 Equip SLC -2000 SONET OC-3 Subsystem ® (Looped Back) (Release 4.0 or Later) DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: Use this procedure to install the SONET subsystem circuit packs.
  • Page 277 NTP-020: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO NOTE: Many of the plug-ins (SYSCTL, BBG7 OHCTL, DS1) have numerous option switches that must be set before they are installed.
  • Page 278 If NO, then continue with Step 8. If YES, then proceed to Step 9. Load the software using procedures found in document 363-208-023, SLC-2000 Access System Software Release Description . This document also contains information on compatible software releases. (See Notes.) Option (select free running option) and install TGS DLP-503 timing plug-ins.
  • Page 279 NTP-020: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 4 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 10. Install OLIUs. NOTE: 22F OLIUs are required for DS1 taper/drop (partial function group VT1 cross-connections) and ring configurations.
  • Page 280 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-020 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 7 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 15. At the CIT, disable the DCC channel by doing the following: While accessing the SONET subsystem, enter: set-fecom:dcc-all At the Communications [CurrentValues] = prompt, enter: disable...
  • Page 281 NTP-020: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 6 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 18. Will the ARM shelf be used for DS1 services (Function Group C) (refer to office records)? If YES, then continue with Step 19.
  • Page 282 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-020 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 7 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 23. Does the SMU contain the correct version of software? If YES, then proceed to Step 25. If NO, then continue with Step 24.

  • Page 283: Equip Slc -2000 Bandwidth Management Complex Circuit Packs (Release 4.0 Or Later)

    363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-021 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 9 Equip SLC ® -2000 Bandwidth Management Complex Circuit Packs (Release 4.0 or Later) DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: This procedure assumes that the system is being equipped for TR-08 †...
  • Page 284 NTP-021: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 9 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO After the ACTIVE LED lights on the BDK 250 TSI, install the BDK 270 BMP circuit pack in the CORE(1) slot marked BMP.
  • Page 285 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-021 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 9 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Initialize the system as follows: At the UIP, press Escape then the Scroll Menu up or down arrow push button until INITIALIZE-SYSTEM <ent>...
  • Page 286 NTP-021: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 4 of 9 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 13. Make CORE (2) the active core as follows: At the UIP, press Escape then the Scroll Menu up or down arrow push button until SWITCH-CORE <ent>...
  • Page 287 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-021 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 9 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO NOTE: TSI/BMP ACTIVE LED lights in CORE (1). The Major or Minor, Abnormal, and NE Activity LEDs light and the SW-CORE: FORCE->1 done is displayed.
  • Page 288 NTP-021: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 6 of 9 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 22. Using the CIT and while accessing the SONET subsystem, execute the command set-ne and proceed as follows: For ...
  • Page 289 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-021 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 9 23. Using the CIT and while accessing the SONET subsystem, execute the command set-fecom and proceed as follows: When the system Then enter ... displays ... One of the following: COM [enabled] = •...
  • Page 290 NTP-021: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 8 of 9 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 24. Using the CIT and while accessing the SONET subsystem, execute the command set-ne and proceed as follows: When the system Then enter ...
  • Page 291 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-021 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 9 of 9 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 25. Using the CIT and while accessing the SONET subsystem, execute the command set-fecom and proceed as follows: When the system Then enter ...

  • Page 292: Preservice Arm Shelf Turnup Tests (Vtu/Ds1 Unit Installation With System Looped Back) (Release 4.0 Or Later)

    363-208-001 Arm Shelf Turnup: NTP-022 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Preservice ARM Shelf Turnup Tests (VTU/DS1 Unit Installation with System Looped Back) (Release 4.0 or Later) DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: This procedure gives the steps for installing the VTU and DS1 circuit packs.
  • Page 293 NTP-022: Arm Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO NOTE: No alarms are present on the system. Using the work order, choose the first LIU/VTU(A) slot for VTU installation.
  • Page 294 363-208-001 Arm Shelf Turnup: NTP-022 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 10. Do you want to install DS1 services? If YES, continue with Step 11. If NO, STOP.
  • Page 295 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-023 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 13 Establish End-to-End System ® -2000 OC-3 Optical Fiber Spans (Release 4.0 or Later) DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO CAUTION: When handling circuit packs, always wear an electrostatic discharge wrist strap connected to an ESD ground jack on the user interface panel (UIP).
  • Page 296 NTP-023: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 13 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Determine the optical loss of each optical span from office records or by making the required measurements at the output of both OLIUs using an optical meter.
  • Page 297 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-023 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 13 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO After changing the option settings and installing the OLIU, press the Update button on the UIP. 10.
  • Page 298 NTP-023: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 4 of 13 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 15. Do you have a Major alarm and a FAULT LED lighted on the SYSCTL and/or OHCTL? If YES, then continue with Step 16.
  • Page 299 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-023 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 13 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO NOTE: See your local company documentation for specific option settings. In some cases, special arrangements have been made with specific companies to include their option settings as an appendix to this document.
  • Page 300 NTP-023: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 6 of 13 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Node 1 Node 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 Ring 1 Ring 2 Node 5...
  • Page 301 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-023 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 13 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO NOTE: When the SLC -2000 system is connected to the network, you may have the alarms indicated above that are caused by a duplicated site/ne address, TBOS display, or TID.
  • Page 302 NTP-023: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 8 of 13 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 29. After determining that timing mode options do not need to be changed, reinstall the circuit pack.
  • Page 303 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-023 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 9 of 13 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 34. Is system equipped with SONET Software Release 6.0, 7.0, or 7.1? If YES, then continue with Step 35. If NO, then proceed to Step 36.
  • Page 304 NTP-023: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 10 of 13 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO NOTE: AGNE should be set to "yes" during turnup procedures at all nodes to extinguish the "communication failure"...
  • Page 305 42. Set the nodes using the set-sync commands. NOTE: The SyncAutoreconfiguration and SyncMessaging options can also be set at this time (check office records for correct settings). NOTE: Use document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for the correct command format.
  • Page 306 NTP-023: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 12 of 13 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 43. Install STS-1 or VT1.5 cross-connections per work order. DLP-520 NOTE: DLP-520 provides cross-connect philosophies for ring applications.
  • Page 307 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-023 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 13 of 13 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 50. Refer to MDS Turnup and Circuit Order Tabs when required. The system is now ready for initial metallic distribution shelf turnup and/or DS1 service to be established.

  • Page 308: Establish Slc -2000 System With Metallic Feeders Interfacing Through Lius (Release 4.0 Or Later)

    363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-024 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 5 Establish SLC ® -2000 System with Metallic Feeders Interfacing Through LIUs (Release 4.0 or Later) DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: The following SONET subsystem circuit packs are required for metallic feeder operation: •...
  • Page 309 NTP-024: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO CAUTION: Take care to avoid damaging the LEDs that protrude through the openings in the faceplate of the circuit packs during handling and circuit pack installation.
  • Page 310 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-024 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 5 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Set option switches and install the BBG8 SYSCTL circuit pack in DLP-534 the ARM shelf. NOTE: SYSCTL FAULT LED is off.
  • Page 311 NTP-024: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 4 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO At the UIP, press the Scroll Menu up or down arrow button until RETRIEVE-PROG-VRSN<ent>...
  • Page 312 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-024 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 5 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Enable the SMU as follows: At the UIP, press Escape then the Scroll Menu up or down arrow push button until SET-STATE-SMU~<ent>...

  • Page 313: Equip Bandwidth Management Complex Circuit Packs For Slc -2000 Systems Configured With Metallic Feeders (Release 4.0 Or Later)

    363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-025 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 6 Equip Bandwidth Management Complex Circuit ® Packs for SLC -2000 Systems Configured with Metallic Feeders (Release 4.0 or Later) DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: Equipping the bandwidth management complex consists of installing the time slot interchange (TSI) circuit packs.
  • Page 314 NTP-025: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO After the ACTIVE LED lights on the BDK 250 TSI, install the BDK 270 BMP circuit pack in the CORE(1) slot marked BMP.
  • Page 315 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-025 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 6 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Initialize the system as follows: At the UIP, press Escape then the Scroll Menu up or down arrow push button until INITIALIZE-SYSTEM <ent>...
  • Page 316 NTP-025: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 4 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO NOTE: TSI/BMP ACTIVE LED lights in CORE (2) and goes off in CORE(1).
  • Page 317 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-025 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 6 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 16. Use the SWITCH-CORE command and select the RESET option to reset the bandwidth management core protection switching state as follows: Press Escape then the Scroll Menu up or down arrow push button until SWITCH-CORE <ent>...
  • Page 318 NTP-025: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 6 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 21. Using the CIT and while accessing the SONET subsystem, execute the command set-ne and proceed as follows (refer to office records): When the system displays ...
  • Page 319 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-026 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Install Line Interface Unit (LIU) for Metallic Feeders (Release 4.0 or Later) DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: This procedure gives the steps for installing the LIUs for metallic feeders in the ARM shelf.
  • Page 320 NTP-026: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Install the BBG267 LIU in the VTU/LIU slot chosen. NOTE: The FAULT LED on the LIU flashes fast when installing the software load and remains on throughout the pack initialization process.
  • Page 321 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-026 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 12. At the UIP, press the Update key. Wait for transient alarms to clear .
  • Page 322 363-208-001 ARM Shelf Turnup: NTP-027 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Initialize SLC ® -2000 Integral Test Head Circuit Packs (Optional) DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: The test head controller (THC) will take channels 23 and 24 (both voice frequency) in digroup A of the digital loop carrier (DLC) system 1 in the metallic distribution shelf (MDS) assembly 1 to allow dial-up access to the Integral Test Head (ITH).
  • Page 323 NTP-027: ARM Shelf Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 2 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Replace the circuit pack associated with the failure. Use the RTRV-STAT menu selection to verify the ITH equipage. The equipage should reflect the circuit packs installed in the ITH subsystem.
  • Page 324 363-208-001 MDS Assembly Turnup: Introduction-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 7 Introduction General This tab provides procedures to establish end-to-end digital loop carrier (DLC) systems by installing support circuit packs in the access resource manager (ARM) shelf (see Figure 1) and the metallic distribution shelf (MDS) assemblies (see Figures ®...
  • Page 325 Introduction-000: MDS Assembly Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 System Capability Up to 28 DS1s can be interfaced, supporting up to 8 metallic distribution shelves [768 DS0s (R4.4 and earlier) or 1,152 DS0s (R4.5 and later)]. The limitation of 28 physical feeder DS1s permits the following configurations: •...
  • Page 326 363-208-001 MDS Assembly Turnup: Introduction-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 7 A DLC system circuit pack will also cause alarms when a metallic distribution shelf that is configured for FITL is equipped with a distant terminal (DT) server that is not linked to a working SLC -2000 MSDT.
  • Page 327 Introduction-000: MDS Assembly Turnup 363-208-001 Page 4 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 Figure 2 – First Metallic Distribution Shelf Assembly, Metallic Distribution...
  • Page 328 363-208-001 MDS Assembly Turnup: Introduction-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 7 Figure 3 – First MDS Assembly, Fiber Distribution (R4.0 to R4.4)
  • Page 329 Introduction-000: MDS Assembly Turnup 363-208-001 Page 6 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 ® Figure 4 – First MDS Assembly, Fiber Distribution (R4.5 or Later With SPQ Servers)
  • Page 330 363-208-001 MDS Assembly Turnup: Introduction-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 7 Figure 5 – First MDS Assembly, Fiber Distribution (R4.5 or Later With SPQ ® Servers)
  • Page 331 363-208-001 MDS Assembly Turnup: Contents-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Contents of This Tab CAUTION: Take care to avoid damaging the LEDs that protrude through the openings in the faceplate of the circuit packs during handling and circuit pack installation.
  • Page 332 Installation: NTP-081 or NTP-082. For procedures to turn up the SLC -2000 MSDT, see document 363-205-004, SLC-2000 Multi-Services Distant Terminal (MSDT) Feature, User/Service and Ordering Manual . For procedures to turn up the DDM-2000 FiberReach multiplexer NBS, see document 363-206-301, DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer,...
  • Page 333 363-208-001 MDS Assembly Turnup: NTP-040 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Install or Verify Installation of Metallic Distribution Shelf (MDS) Support Circuit Packs in ARM Shelf DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: This procedure ensures that the ARM shelf is properly equipped to support MDS assembly turnup.
  • Page 334 NTP-040: MDS Assembly Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Verify that proper SONET cross-connections have been made per DLP-520 system records or work order. Are you turning up a TR-08 mode 1 system or a TR-303 system? If TR-08, continue with Step 6.
  • Page 335 363-208-001 MDS Assembly Turnup: NTP-040 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 10. Are you turning up a TR-08 system or a TR-303 system? If TR-08, continue with Step 11 If TR-303, go to Step 12.
  • Page 336 363-208-001 MDS Assembly Turnup: NTP-041 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 8 Equip an MDS Assembly DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: • For TR-08 Systems: At the Metallic Distribution Shelf (MDS) assembly, install the PTU, MDC, and T8U circuit packs (two of each, one on each side) in the shelf being turned up (upper or lower shelf in the MDS assembly).
  • Page 337 This selects the appropriate distribution mode on a shelf. A SET-DISTN:#:mode done message will print. Enter the ED-DISTN command and select the appropriate shelf and distribution mode. See document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for more information.
  • Page 338 363-208-001 MDS Assembly Turnup: NTP-041 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 8 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Are you establishing a TR-08 or a TR-303 MDS assembly (Refer to office records)? If TR-08, continue with Step 5.
  • Page 339 NTP-041: MDS Assembly Turnup 363-208-001 Page 4 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Choose either the upper or lower shelf of the MDS assembly to begin installing common circuit packs (Figure 1).
  • Page 340 363-208-001 MDS Assembly Turnup: NTP-041 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 8 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 11. After the powerup alarm sequence is observed (momentarily lighting LEDs on these circuit packs) and transient alarms settle (about 2 minutes after software loads and the LED stops flashing), are there FAULT LEDs lighted on any of the circuit packs installed?
  • Page 341 ED-MODE-T8U::shelf-#::::T8UMODE=N; Where shelf-# is the number of the shelf you wish to mark as not needing the T8U circuit pack (check office records). (See document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for more information on this command.) NOTE: Any shelf equipped without a T8U eliminates its use as a TR-08 VRT.
  • Page 342 363-208-001 MDS Assembly Turnup: NTP-041 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 8 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 23. After the powerup alarm sequence is observed (momentarily lighting LEDs on these circuit packs), wait several minutes (about 2 minutes after software loads) for transient alarms to settle.
  • Page 343 NTP-041: MDS Assembly Turnup 363-208-001 Page 8 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 27. Select the lower shelf for TR-303 turnup. Return to Step 18. 28.
  • Page 344 363-208-001 MDS Assembly Turnup: NTP-042 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 10 Establish End-to-End DLC System with a ® 96 COT or Integrated into a TR-08 or TR-303 Digital Switch DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary : Verify that the data base and connections have been installed on the local digital switch (LDS) or the SLC 96 system.
  • Page 345 NTP-042: MDS Assembly Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 10 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Are you installing standard T0 cross-connections at this time? If YES, continue with Step 4. If NO, go to Step 5.
  • Page 346 363-208-001 MDS Assembly Turnup: NTP-042 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 10 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO NOTE: If T1 cross-connections other than the standard cross-connections are used, refer to the work order and install the T1 cross-connections using a CIT and local procedures.
  • Page 347 NTP-042: MDS Assembly Turnup 363-208-001 Page 4 of 10 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Example of recommended T1 cross-connections and 5ESS switch DS1 assignments: The following tables provide a typical example of recommended T1 cross-connections made at the CIT and 5ESS switch DS1 assignments.
  • Page 348 363-208-001 MDS Assembly Turnup: NTP-042 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 10 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Before turning the system up in-service, verify that the logical DS1s are lined up (refer to the following example). If the logical DS1s are not lined up, there will be "no dial tone"...
  • Page 349 NTP-042: MDS Assembly Turnup 363-208-001 Page 6 of 10 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO At the RT, determine which VTU/LIU LEDs correspond to the system being established. •...
  • Page 350 363-208-001 MDS Assembly Turnup: NTP-042 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 10 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Are you connecting to a TR-08 COT (such as a SLC 96 COT) or a TR-08 digital switch? If YES, continue with Step 9.
  • Page 351 NTP-042: MDS Assembly Turnup 363-208-001 Page 8 of 10 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 14. Determine the next digroup for the CO craftsperson to connect from the TR-08 system to the DDM-2000 or T1 line and proceed as follows: And the CO craftsperson...
  • Page 352 363-208-001 MDS Assembly Turnup: NTP-042 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 9 of 10 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Table A – TEST-VRT-ALARM Alarm Summary Central Office Remote ® Alarm Selected SLC -2000 Alarms DLC Alarms Alarms...
  • Page 353 DT Server") and install DT Server units as required. NOTE: For procedures to turn up the SLC -2000 MSDT, see document 363-205-004, SLC-2000 MSDT User/Service Manual . For procedures to turn up the DDM-2000 FiberReach multiplexer narrowband shelf (NBS), see document 363-206-301, DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer, Wideband/Narrowband Shelf, User/Service Manual .
  • Page 354 363-208-001 MDS Assembly Turnup: NTP-043 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 5 Establish End-to-End DLC System for ® -2000 COT with a SLC -2000 RT DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: If needed, install T1 and T0 cross-connections.
  • Page 355 NTP-043: MDS Assembly Turnup 363-208-001 Page 2 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Are you installing standard TR-08 T0 cross-connections at this time? If YES, continue with Step 4. If NO, go to Step 5.
  • Page 356 363-208-001 MDS Assembly Turnup: NTP-043 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 5 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Determine which VTU/LIU LEDs correspond to the system being established as follows: If the VTU/LIU And you're indicator...
  • Page 357 NTP-043: MDS Assembly Turnup 363-208-001 Page 4 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Table A – TEST-VRT-ALARM Alarm Summary Central Office Remote ® Alarm Selected -2000 Alarms DLC Alarms Alarms...
  • Page 358 DT Server") and install DT Server units as required. NOTE: For procedures to turn up the SLC -2000 MSDT, see document 363-205-004, SLC-2000 MSDT User/Service Manual . For procedures to turn up the DDM-2000 FiberReach multiplexer narrowband shelf (NBS), see document 363-206-301, DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer, Wideband/Narrowband Shelf, User/Service Manual .
  • Page 359 363-208-001 MDS Assembly Turnup: NTP-044 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 4 Establish End-to-End DLC System with an Integrated Network Access (INA) System DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO ® Summary: This procedure is used to establish an end-to-end SLC -2000 Access System with an INA system (for example, a D4 channel bank).
  • Page 360 INA system. NOTE: Use the ED-T1 or ED-INA CIT command. Refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages . Establish communications with the far end. At the RT, determine which VTU/LIU LEDs correspond to the INA system being established.
  • Page 361 363-208-001 MDS Assembly Turnup: NTP-044 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 4 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Select the first DS1 of the INA system for the CO craftsperson to connect.
  • Page 362 DT Server") and install DT server units as required. NOTE: For procedures to turn up the SLC -2000 MSDT, see document 363-205-004, SLC-2000 Multi-Services Distant Terminal (MSDT) Feature, User/Service and Ordering Manual . For procedures to turn up the DDM-2000...
  • Page 363 363-208-001 Circuit Order: Introduction-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 1 Introduction General ® This tab provides procedures to add, change, or remove service in a SLC -2000 Access System. When adding DS1 services, in this procedure it is assumed that the SONET or metallic feeder subsystem is turned up and connected end to end.
  • Page 364 363-208-001 Circuit Order: Contents-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Contents of This Tab CAUTION: Take care to avoid damaging the LEDs that protrude through the openings in the faceplate of the circuit packs during handling and circuit pack installation. CAUTION: When handling circuit packs, always wear an electrostatic discharge wrist strap connected to an ESD ground jack on the user interface panel (UIP) or fan...
  • Page 365 Contents-000: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 2 of 2 Issue 9, April 1998 Upgrade DLC Subsystem Software from Release 3.1 to Release 3.2 or Higher ........NTP-069 Convert Integrated TR-08 Service to TR-303 Service at the SLC -2000 Remote Terminal (RT) .

  • Page 366: Establish Ds1 Services For Sonet

    363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-060 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Establish DS1 Services for SONET DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO CAUTION: When handling circuit packs, always wear an electrostatic discharge wrist strap connected to an ESD ground jack on the user interface panel (UIP) or fan assembly.
  • Page 367 NTP-060: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Test MXRVO protection switching function by momentarily removing the MXRVO (for at least 15 seconds) that has its ACTIVE LED lighted.
  • Page 368 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-060 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO NOTE: DS1 cross-connections must be made on the SONET subsystem as VT1.5 cross-connections. Make required DS1 cross-connection(s) for circuit(s) being added. Assist central office craftsperson to perform DS1 transmission tests if required (such as installing a DS1 loopback patch cord).

  • Page 369: Establish End-To-End System Slc

    363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-061 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Establish End-to-End System ® -2000 OC-3 Optical Fiber Span Extension STS-1 (Whole Function Group) Taper DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO General: This procedure is used to equip Function Group C with OLIU circuit packs to add an access point node to the SONET network.
  • Page 370 NTP-061: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO CAUTION: Take care to avoid damaging the LEDs that protrude through the openings in the faceplate of the circuit packs during handling and circuit pack installation.
  • Page 371 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-061 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO When the SLC -2000 RT is connected to the network, you may have a Major alarm and a FAULT LED lighted on the SYSCTL and/or OHCTL caused by a duplicated site/ne address, TBOS display, or TID.

  • Page 372: Discontinue Service At A Slc

    363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-062 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 6 Discontinue Service at a SLC ® -2000 Remote Terminal (RT) for a TR-08 Universal System DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO General: This procedure is used to remove service for either the SONET subsystem (DS1 services) or the digital loop carrier (DLC) subsystem (carrier system services).
  • Page 373 NTP-062: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 2 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Verify that all customer service associated with the service being removed has been discontinued or rerouted at the central office. What type of service do you want to remove? If DLC services, then continue with Step 2.
  • Page 374 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-062 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 6 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO At the RT, remove the MDC packs associated with the DLC system. Response: Major alarm clears. (All alarms will clear after the CO DDM-2000 or SLC -2000 system is updated.) At the RT, remove the PTU packs, T8U packs, and all channel units associated with the DLC system.
  • Page 375 NTP-062: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 4 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 11. If the VTU was removed at the COT (above), remove the VTU at the RT and update the RT again.
  • Page 376 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-062 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 6 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 19. Update system records. 20. If you want to remove other services from the system, repeat from Step 1.
  • Page 377 NTP-062: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 6 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 29. Remove the other OLIU pack in the function group. Then press the UPD/INT SYSCTL button. Response: Critical and NE Activity LEDs light and go off after pressing the UPD/INT button.

  • Page 378: Install And Test Spq

    363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-063 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 6 Install and Test SPQ ® 450 Channel Unit at RT ® for Analog to Integrated SLC Precutover DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: This procedure is used to install and test the SPQ 450 channel unit prior to cutting service over to an integrated SLC -2000 Access System.
  • Page 379 NTP-063: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 2 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Central office Optional bridge lifter Cross-connect Analog Copper VF switch Office to office Protector DSX-1 -2000...
  • Page 380 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-063 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 6 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO CAUTION: This procedure is not to be started unless it has been verified that the tip and ring leads of the remote terminal drop are not connected to an in-service circuit (removing the protector is an easy method to disconnect the leads).
  • Page 381 NTP-063: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 4 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Request the switching craftsperson to provision the SPQ 450 channel unit for the precutover (inactive) state. Measure the voltage across ring to ground.
  • Page 382 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-063 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 6 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 14. Is bridge lifter to be used at connection point? If YES, then continue with Step 15. If NO, then proceed to Step 16.
  • Page 383 NTP-063: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 6 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 19. Is signal level at 1.0 kHz greater than –8.5 dBm? (For example, −8 dBm is greater than −8.5 dBm.) If YES, then continue with Step 20.

  • Page 384: Convert A Point-To-Point System To A Ring System

    363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-064 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 5 Convert a Point-to-Point System to a Ring System DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: This procedure, changing a point-to-point system to a ring system, requires cooperation between the central office (CO) and the remote terminal (RT).
  • Page 385 All nodes in the same network must have the same software release. NOTE: You may also contact Lucent Technologies to provide an in-service upgrade. Experienced Lucent Technologies installers will help you plan and execute the network upgrade. For more information,...
  • Page 386 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-064 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 5 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Is the CIT located locally or at a remote location? DLP-521 If locally, then continue with Step 2. If remote location, then go to Step 3.
  • Page 387 NTP-064: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 4 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO CAUTION: Transmission configuration information for in-service systems is stored on the TGS circuit pack in TGS slot 1. In some instances (for example, during system tests or while performing this upgrade), if the version of software being installed is not compatible with the current transmission...
  • Page 388 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-064 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 5 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 13. Reinstall TGS circuit pack in TGS slot 1. Then, use the switch-sync:s=circuitpack,pri=reset command. 14.

  • Page 389: Add New Slc -2000 Oc-3 Node (Shelf) To Oc-3 Vt1.5 Path Switched Ring

    363-205-001 Circuit Order: NTP-065 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 6 Add New SLC ® -2000 OC-3 Node (Shelf) to OC-3 VT1.5 Path Switched Ring DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO CAUTION: When handling circuit packs, always wear an electrostatic discharge wrist strap connected to an ESD ground jack on...
  • Page 390 NTP-065: Circuit Order 363-205-001 Page 2 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Connect a craft interface terminal (CIT) to the user interface panel DLP-521 (UIP) to log in to the SONET subsystem and use the rtrv-alm command to verify that no alarms, locks, loops, or switches are present.
  • Page 391 363-205-001 Circuit Order: NTP-065 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 6 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO NOTE: It may be helpful to make a sketch of the network to visualize the cross-connections required.
  • Page 392 NTP-065: Circuit Order 363-205-001 Page 4 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Use the ent-crs-vt1: command at the new shelf to make all required pass-through cross-connections (for example, ent-crs-vt1:m-1-1-1,m-1-1-1).
  • Page 393 363-205-001 Circuit Order: NTP-065 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 6 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO NOTE: The new shelf TGS option switches are probably set for free running . Before the end-to-end system is established, the specified ( looped timing ) timing mode must be set on the TGS circuit pack.
  • Page 394 NTP-065: Circuit Order 363-205-001 Page 6 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO NOTE: If the report in this step indicates wrong fiber connections or no connection, verify that fecom is ON (rtrv-fecom:) and check fiber integrity.

  • Page 395: Convert (Upgrade) Slc -2000 Access System To Ds1 Add/Drop System

    363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-067 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Convert (Upgrade) SLC ® -2000 Access System to DS1 Add/Drop System DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: This procedure is used to convert/upgrade a SLC -2000 SONET to a DS1 add/drop shelf.
  • Page 396 NTP-067: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 2 of 2 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Use the cnvt-crs: address1,address2 command to convert the required STS-1 cross-connections to DS1 cross-connections. CAUTION: Execution of the cnvt-crs command for existing STS-1 cross-connections that are supporting DS3 or other non-DS1...
  • Page 397 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-068 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 1 Convert Service from Mode 1 to Mode 2 or from Mode 2 to Mode 1 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO CAUTION: Active calls will be dropped during mode conversions.

  • Page 398: Upgrade Dlc Subsystem Software From Release 3.1 To Release 3.2 Or Higher

    363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-069 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 5 Upgrade DLC Subsystem Software from Release 3.1 to Release 3.2 or Higher DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO CAUTION: Read through this procedure prior to starting — the steps can only be done one time.
  • Page 399 Enter ATT01 (default login) and press Return. The PC responds with: password < Enter SLC -2000 (default password) and press Return. Lucent Technologies copyright information is displayed. Press to continue. Return NOTE: Record the TID information (site1ne1), which is displayed immediately following the .
  • Page 400 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-069 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 5 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Response: A detailed SONET subsystem status and alarm message will be displayed on the screen. A detailed DLC subsystem status and alarm message will be displayed on the screen in response to a Y Return...
  • Page 401 NTP-069: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 4 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO When you have verified the software being downloaded is R3.02.01 or later, press .
  • Page 402 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-069 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 5 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO DLP-500 CAUTION: To avoid interrupting service, make sure no manual conditions (manual/force/lockout) exist before enabling the SMU with the SET-STATE-SMU or ED-STATE-SMU command.

  • Page 403: Convert Integrated Tr-08 Service To Tr-303 Service At The Slc -2000 Remote Terminal (Rt)

    NOTE: Ensure that the RT is running SLC-2000 Software Release 4.00.02 or later before starting this procedure. Lucent Technologies does not recommend converting the RT software from Release 3.0X.0X to Release 4.00.02 or later concurrent with...
  • Page 404 NTP-071: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 2 of 11 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO NOTE: Note that DS1 feeders in TR-303 require B8ZS line coding whereas TR-08 normally requires AMI line coding. Before starting this process, ensure that all points requiring line coding changes have been identified (such as LDS, DDM nodes, DACS systems, RT).
  • Page 405 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-071 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 11 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Retrieve all existing T1 cross-connection information in this VRT entering the CIT command RTRV-CRS-T1::vrtfdr- X -all where X is the VRT number of the shelf being converted.
  • Page 406 NTP-071: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 4 of 11 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Wait until the LDS personnel removes the DS1s from service before proceeding with the next steps (verified by the yellow LEDs being lighted on the VTU/LIU providing service to the VRT you are converting).
  • Page 407 Use the detailed information obtained in sequentially assigned Step 2 or refer to the work order in reestablishing the T0 cross-connections. Refer to the ENT-CRS-T0 command in document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for assistance in addressing within the TR-303 VRT.
  • Page 408 NTP-071: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 6 of 11 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 15. Using the work order, establish the T1 (DS1) cross-connections with the following command: ENT-CRS-T1::a- VV - DD :::v3fdr-1- XX where: VV is the VTU/LIU pack...
  • Page 409 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-071 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 11 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 18. Ensure all DS0 cross-connections are accurate by entering the RTRV-CRS-T0::v3dp-1-all or RTRV-CRS-T0::v3dp-2-all command and verifying the results. 19.
  • Page 410 NTP-071: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 8 of 11 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 24. Have LDS personnel identify an individual circuit in which the service will be moved from the TR-08 VRT to the TR-303 VRT. 25.
  • Page 411 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-071 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 9 of 11 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 29. Repeat Steps 24 through 28 for all lines in the TR-08 VRT. 30. Once all lines are removed from the TR-08 VRT, verify that all cross-connections were removed by entering the command RTRV-CRS-T0::vrtdp- X -all.
  • Page 412 NTP-071: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 10 of 11 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 33. Verify that all DS1s (T1) are removed by entering the command rtrv-crs-t1::vrtfdr- X -all. 34.
  • Page 413 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-071 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 11 of 11 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 37. Ensure that all DS1 cross-connections are accurate by entering the RTRV-CRS-T1::v3fdr-1-all or RTRV-CRS-T1:: v3fdr-2-all command and verifying the results.

  • Page 414: Upgrade Dlc Subsystem Software (Release 3.02.01 To Release 4.02.00 Or Higher)

    363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-073 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 8 Upgrade DLC Subsystem Software (Release 3.02.01 or 3.22.01 to Release 4.02.00 or Higher) DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO CAUTION: Read through this procedure prior to starting —...
  • Page 415 NTP-073: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 2 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Response: Verify that no alarms are raised and the system functions without incident on the other copy of the TSI circuit pack before starting this conversion.
  • Page 416 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-073 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 8 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO From the DLC prompt enter: RTRV-EQPT::SMU. Response: The system displays the currently stored version of software on the SMU.
  • Page 417 NTP-073: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 4 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Response: The PDC and the SMU will reset. Wait 5 minutes after the reset to allow the system to return to a stable state.
  • Page 418 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-073 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 8 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO While monitoring the installation of the new software load in the PDC or the automatic enabling of the SMU, verify that the installation process continues in the following order: NOTE: Ignore all transient fault messages and alarms while the...
  • Page 419 809 S2:2 and MC97793A1 BIU, SPQ 810 and FHB2 DSXBIU, or SPQ 811 and FHB2 DSXBIU) will start to install the new BIU/DSXBIU software load [refer to document 363-205-004, SLC-2000 Multi-Services Distant Terminal (MSDT) Feature, User/Service Manual , or document 363-206-301,...
  • Page 420 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-073 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 8 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO H. If this is an upgrade to Software Release 4.04.0X and SPQ 809 DT Servers will be upgraded to SPQ 810 DT Servers, then refer to NTP-076.
  • Page 421 If FITL is being used, check that the number of lines for each server has been correctly provisioned. Refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for the RTRV-T0, RTRV-NBS, and RTRV-DT command pages.

  • Page 422: Upgrade Dlc Subsystem Software (Release 4.0X.0X To Release 4.02.00 Or Higher)

    363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-074 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 6 Upgrade DLC Subsystem Software (Release 4.0X.0X to Release 4.02.00 or Higher) DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO CAUTION: Read through this procedure prior to starting — the steps can only be done one time.
  • Page 423 NTP-074: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 2 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO NOTE: While conversion from R4.00.01 to R4.02.00 or higher is supported, notice that when the core does a side switch to load the other core, calls in progress will be dropped.
  • Page 424 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-074 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 6 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO From the DLC prompt enter: RTRV-EQ::SMU. Response: The system displays the currently stored version of software on the SMU.
  • Page 425 809 S2:2 and MC97793A1 BIU, SPQ 810 and FHB2 DSXBIU, or SPQ 811 and FHB2 DSXBIU) will start to install the new BIU/DSXBIU software load [refer to document 363-205-004, SLC-2000 Multi-Services Distant Terminal (MSDT) Feature, User/Service Manual , or document 363-206-301,...
  • Page 426 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-074 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 6 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO If this is an upgrade to Software Release 4.04.0X and SPQ 809 DT Servers will be upgraded to SPQ 810 DT Servers, then refer to NTP-076.
  • Page 427 If FITL is being used, check that the number of lines for each server has been correctly provisioned. Refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for the RTRV-T0, RTRV-NBS, and RTRV-DT command pages.
  • Page 428 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-075 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 4 Upgrade DLC Subsystem Software from Release 3.02 or 3.22 to Release 3.03 or Higher DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO CAUTION: Read through this procedure prior to starting —...
  • Page 429 . The system responds with the Return following: login < Enter ATT01 (default login) and press Return. The PC responds with: password < Enter SLC-2000 (default password) and press Return. Lucent Technologies copyright information is displayed. Press to continue. Return...
  • Page 430 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-075 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 4 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO NOTE: Record the TID information (site1ne1), which is displayed immediately following the . For example, the header Return format is displayed as follows: site1ne1 94-07-28 13:21:02 system SLC- 2000...
  • Page 431 NTP-075: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 4 of 4 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO When you have verified the software being downloaded is DLP-500 R3.03.00 or higher, press .

  • Page 432: Upgrade Dlc Subsystem Spq

    Release 4.04.0X DLC version software with SPQ 809 DT Servers to SPQ 810 DT Servers to provide octet mode of operation at the DDM-2000 FiberReach narrowband shelf (NBS). CAUTION: This procedure will interrupt service for any SLC-2000 multi-services distant terminal (MSDT) or FiberReach NBS currently connected to the DT Server being upgraded. NOTE: This procedure should not be performed if a BIU/DSXBIU software installation and download is in progress.
  • Page 433 NTP-076: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 2 of 2 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO CAUTION: Refer to the SPQ 810 DT Server data sheet, 363-005-389, and the chapter entitled "About This Document" for the proper precautions to observe when handling circuit packs to prevent damage caused by electrostatic discharge.

  • Page 434: Upgrade Sonet Subsystem Oc-3 Ring Network To Oc-12 Ring Network Using Oc-3 Shelves In Service

    363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-077 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 7 Upgrade SONET Subsystem OC-3 Ring Network to OC-12 Ring Network Using OC-3 Shelves In Service DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO General: This procedure is used to convert an OC-3 VT1.5 path protected ring network to an OC-12 path protected ring network using 24G-U OLIUs in the SONET subsection of SLC -2000 shelves.
  • Page 435 NTP-077: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 2 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Figure 1 – Example of OC-3 to OC-12 Ring Upgrade...
  • Page 436 OC-3 Release 11 software must be installed in all OC-3 node shelves in the ring. NOTE: You may also contact Lucent Technologies to provide this in-service upgrade. Experienced Lucent Technologies installers will help you plan and execute the network upgrade. For more information, contact your Lucent Technologies Account Representative.
  • Page 437 NTP-077: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 4 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO CAUTION: Sync autoconfiguration must be enabled at each line-timed node in the network. At each node in the network, use set-oc3:syncmsg= Kbyte/Sbyte command to set Kbyte or Sbyte sync messages.
  • Page 438 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-077 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 7 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO NOTE: A CP removed alarm will occur in this step when the MAIN 1 OLIU is removed.
  • Page 439 NTP-077: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 6 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO CAUTION: After the 24G-U OLIUs and faceplate connectors have been installed in the SLC -2000 ARM shelf, the left front shelf cover, when closed, may contact the OLIU faceplate connectors causing a potential service or equipment problem.
  • Page 440 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-077 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 7 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Last Span Optical Upgrade NOTE: A CP removed alarm will occur when the MAIN 1 OLIU is removed from the starting Node.

  • Page 441: Add Ds1 Service To An In-Service Slc -2000 Tr-303 System

    363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-078 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Add DS1 Service to an In-Service ® -2000 TR-303 System DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Summary: This procedure gives the steps for adding DS1 service to an in-service metallic fed SLC -2000 TR-303 system.
  • Page 442 NTP-078: Circuit Order 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Remove the LIU with the lighted FAULT LED and obtain a new LIU. Return to Step 2 . Using the work order, have all LIUs been installed? If NO, continue with Step 6.
  • Page 443 363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-078 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 13. At the DSX-1 panel, make the proper connections between the SLC DSX and the local digital switch (LDS) DSX. 14.

  • Page 444: Provision Individual Ds0 Circuits For Service

    363-208-001 Circuit Order: NTP-079 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Provision Individual DS0 Circuits for Service DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO General: This procedure can be used to provision individual DS0 circuits prior to being turned up for service.
  • Page 445 • For other types of CUs, follow the provisioning procedure listed in Chapter 5, "Administration and Provisioning", for the software release being used. Additional provisioning information can also be found in document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages . STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE.
  • Page 446 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: Introduction-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Introduction General This tab provides procedures to clear troubles on a SLC ® -2000 Access System. These procedures assume that at a previous time, the system was in-service and no alarms were present.
  • Page 447 Introduction-000: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 -48V(UIP)/2A -48V(A)/10A -48V -48V -48V DDS Clock DDS DS0 DS1 T1-R1 E&M Panel Fault Attention Critical Major NE Activity Abnormal +5V(CIT)/0.5A -48V(B)/10A USER INTERFACE PANEL Power Scroll Menu Enter Escape LED Test...
  • Page 448 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: Introduction-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 Channel units Channel units Common units 25-36 37-48 Metallic Distrib ution Shelf BDJ200 BDJ240 BDJ240 BDJ200 BDJ200 BDJ240 BDJ240 BDJ200 Channel units Channel units Common units 1-12 13-24 Note: The configur ation shown is for Softw are Release 4.0...
  • Page 449 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: Contents-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Contents of This Tab CAUTION: Take care to avoid damaging the LEDs that protrude through the openings in the faceplate of the circuit packs during handling and circuit pack installation. CAUTION: When handling circuit packs, always wear an electrostatic discharge wrist strap connected to an ESD ground jack on the user interface panel (UIP).
  • Page 450 Contents-000: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 2 of 2 Issue 9, April 1998 Clear Trouble with the Tollgrade Digital DC Bypass Pair Channel Units..........TAP-111 Clear Blown Fuse in the MDS or HDOS Assembly During Acceptance Testing .

  • Page 451: Maintenance Philosophy

    363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAD-100 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 8 Maintenance Philosophy Overview The SLC ® -2000 Access System is comprised of four subsystems: • An optional synchronous optical network (SONET) transport system • An optional metallic transport system •...
  • Page 452 SONET subsystem (when equipped), the DLC subsystem, or the ITH subsystem. Document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , provides a description of the commands available for a CIT connected to a SLC -2000 system.
  • Page 453 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAD-100 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 8 COACH Assistance Various customer computer-support tools are on-line and available by means of customized on-line aid for customer help (COACH). A login identification and password must be obtained to gain access to the COACH tools. Contact your regional SLC -2000 and DDM-2000 coordinator for information on obtaining a COACH login.
  • Page 454 TAD-100: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 4 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 Before removing an active TSI or BMP, change the active core by using the UIP SWITCH-CORE or CIT SW-TOPROTN command. Refer to DLP-528. Before removing an active LIU, change to the protection LIU by using the UIP SWITCH-LIU or CIT SW-TOPROTN command.
  • Page 455 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAD-100 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 8 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Considerations Any integrated circuit on a circuit pack can be damaged by static electricity that builds up within a work area, particularly in areas with low relative humidity. This static buildup on work surfaces and on personnel and their clothing is produced by the various charging effects of even simple movements and by contact between various objects.
  • Page 456 TAD-100: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 6 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 Table A – UIP Display Alarm and Status Indicators Indicator Type LED Color Description The UIP detects −48 V at its power feeder input. Power Status Green Attention Status Yellow The alphanumeric display has new fault or alarm messages to be...
  • Page 457 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAD-100 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 8 Table B – Faceplate Indicators, Controls, and Inputs LEDs Plug-In Controls Yellow Green 7-seg Tst Pts/Jacks TEST, O or BUSY, FAIL, 19.2, 38.4, T, R, T1, R1 E, LB STATUS SW56, SYNC Test...
  • Page 458 TAD-100: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 8 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 Table C – UIP Command Entry and Miscellaneous Push Buttons Button Type Description Scroll Menu Command (two buttons) The Scroll Up push button scrolls the display backward one line at a time through the menu selections. (up) The Scroll Down push button scrolls the display forward through menu selections.

  • Page 459: Access System Cot Or Rt

    363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-101 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 6 Isolate Trouble to a SLC ® -2000 Access System COT or RT Summary: This procedure directs the craftsperson to the SLC -2000 remote terminal (RT) if no trouble is found at the central office, or directs the craftsperson to the central office if no trouble is found at the SLC -2000 RT.
  • Page 460 TAP-101: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 2 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 On the SYSCTL pack at the SLC -2000 terminal, press the SYSCTL FE SEL button to display the local shelf alarms on the UIP ( STATUS -LOCAL SYSTEM is printed on the display).
  • Page 461 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-101 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 6 Is the green POWER LED lighted? If YES, continue with Step 7. If NO, go to TAP-102. At the UIP, press the LED Test button. Do any LEDs light when the LED Test button is pressed? If YES, continue with Step 9.
  • Page 462 TAP-101: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 4 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 On the SYSCTL pack at the SLC -2000 COT, press the SYSCTL FE SEL button to display the local shelf alarms on the UIP ( STATUS -LOCAL SYSTEM is printed on the display).
  • Page 463 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-101 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 6 10. At the SLC 96 COT or digital switch, sectionalize trouble as follows: If you are at a ... And ... Then ... SLC 96 COT or Clear trouble with the SLC -2000 RT. Far-end (FE) and Digital Switch major (MJ) or minor...
  • Page 464 TAP-101: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 6 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 11. Find the system originating alarms by operating the SYSCTL FE SEL button as shown below until the NE and major (MJ), minor (MN), or critical alarms are shown: Press SYSCTL FE SEL button ...

  • Page 465: Clear Alarms On A Slc -2000 Access System

    363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-102 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Clear Alarms on a SLC ® -2000 Access System Summary: This procedure directs you to a specific trouble-clearing procedure depending on the trouble your system is experiencing. Prerequisites: In this procedure the following is assumed: •...
  • Page 466 TAP-102: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 2 of 2 Issue 9, April 1998 Table A – Alarm Indications Trouble Indication Procedure • Power alarm from UIP or CIT Power trouble TAP-114 • Blown fuses • No AC power • Faulty UIP display panel •...

  • Page 467: Clear Oliu Or Fiber Trouble On A Slc -2000 Access System When Oliu Fault Led Is Flashing

    363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-103 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 10 Clear OLIU or Fiber Trouble on a SLC ® -2000 Access System When OLIU FAULT LED Is Flashing Summary: This procedure includes a general discussion of how to sectionalize OLIU and fiber path failures.
  • Page 468 TAP-103: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 2 of 10 Issue 9, April 1998 If a 21G OLIU is used, use a CIT to verify that the HIGH/LOW POWER option is set correctly. CAUTION: Open optical connectors may emit invisible laser radiation. Do not view beam with optical instruments.
  • Page 469 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-103 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 10 Is the FAULT LED on the near-end OLIU lighted, flashing, or off? If lighted (not flashing), continue with Step 2. If flashing, go to Step 3. If off, go to Step 6. Sectionalize trouble as follows: If the Near-End And the Far-End...
  • Page 470 TAP-103: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 4 of 10 Issue 9, April 1998 Sectionalize trouble as follows: If the ... And ... Then, do the following ... Near-end OLIU You have an At the near end, measure the power on FAULT LED is optical test set the input fiber with the test set.
  • Page 471 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-103 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 10 Has the trouble cleared? If NO, continue with Step 6. If YES, STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. At the SLC -2000 terminal, press the SYSCTL FE SEL button to display the local shelf alarms on the UIP.
  • Page 472 TAP-103: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 6 of 10 Issue 9, April 1998 Does the SONET subsystem have a Critical alarm? If YES, then continue with Step 8. If NO, then go to Step 19. Replace any OLIU with a FAULT LED lighted and not flashing. Does the SONET subsystem still have a Critical alarm? If YES, then continue with Step 10.
  • Page 473 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-103 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 10 Edge Connector HIGH POWER I or III POWER Component Side Figure 1 – OLIU Option Switch 13. Connect a clean fiber jumper between the IN and OUT connectors on the OLIU.
  • Page 474 TAP-103: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 8 of 10 Issue 9, April 1998 18. Sectionalize trouble using local procedures. Refer to Table A and Figure 2, if necessary. STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. 19. Remove the fiber connected to the IN jack of the OLIU with the flashing LED. 20.
  • Page 475 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-103 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 9 of 10 Far-End OLIUs Main OLIU Protect OLIU slot (1) slot (2) A transmission path failure A, B, C, or D may be caused by a bad OLIU transmitter, a bad OLIU receiver, or a bad fiber connecting to the OLIUs.
  • Page 476 TAP-103: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 10 of 10 Issue 9, April 1998 Table A – OC-3 High-Speed OLIU/Fiber Facility Trouble, Minor Alarm Status (Note) After Trouble Near Near-End OLIU Far-End OLIU Signal Active Main Protect Main Protect Path Before Trouble Trouble Active Fault Active Fault...

  • Page 477: Use Uip Or Cit To Isolate Trouble On A Slc -2000 Access System

    CIT is logged into the DLC subsystem (DLP-521, DLP-525, or DLP-541). This command prints the alarm list and then the fault list on the CIT display. See document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , "Output Messages and Reports" for information pertaining to this report.
  • Page 478 TAP-104: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 2 of 38 Issue 9, April 1998 The RETRIEVE-FAULTS and RETRIEVE-ALARMS UIP commands print a message (using the Scroll Menu down arrow once the command is selected) on the display panel with the following general syntax: Alarm-severity:Which-end:Description Each variable has the following meaning: •...
  • Page 479 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-104 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 38 ® Table A – Examples of SLC -2000 DLC Subsystem Access Identifiers Object Entity Address Example ARM Slots Test Head Controller Slot Virtual Tributary Unit (VTU) Slot ls-a-{1-8} ls-a-2 Line Interface Unit (LIU) Slot ls-a-{1-8}...
  • Page 480 TAP-104: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 4 of 38 Issue 9, April 1998 Are you using a CIT or a UIP? If CIT, continue with Step 2. If UIP, go to Step 3. With the CIT logged in to the DLC subsystem, enter RTRV-ALM. Go to Step 4. NOTE: For details of logging in to the DLC subsystem, refer to one of the following procedures:...
  • Page 481 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-104 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 38 Do the following for the selected fault indication: If the fault list indicates... Then do the following... And go to... circuit pack Step 17 Reseat the circuit pack identified in the fault failed message and wait 5 minutes to see if the circuit pack reinitializes.
  • Page 482 TAP-104: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 6 of 38 Issue 9, April 1998 If the fault list indicates... Then do the following... And go to... circuit pack No negative or positive ringing voltage is present. Step 17 neg or pos • If all PTUs in an MDS assembly have this rng input fault , check/replace MDS fuses or clear ringing generator trouble.
  • Page 483 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-104 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 38 10. Replace the circuit pack(s) in the order listed in the fault message list with the following exceptions: If the FAULT message list Then do the following... indicates link failure between any circuit pack and...
  • Page 484 TAP-104: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 8 of 38 Issue 9, April 1998 12. Retrieve the fault list again using the CIT or UIP. 13. Does a link fault still exist? If YES, continue with Step 14. If NO, go to Step 17. 14.
  • Page 485 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-104 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 9 of 38 20. Have you tried to clear all faults listed in the fault list message? If NO, continue with Step 21. If YES, go to Step 22. 21. Select the next fault in the fault list message and return to Step 8 . 22.
  • Page 486 TAP-104: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 10 of 38 Issue 9, April 1998 Table B – UIP Fault Messages Address Message Meaning (Note) pdc, smu, tsi-n, 12v failure A fault has been detected in the internal 12 V bmp-n, ls-a-n DC power supply. Likely causes are a fault on the PDC, SMU, TSI, BMP, VTU, or LIU circuit packs, or failure of the UIP circuit module.
  • Page 487 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-104 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 11 of 38 Table B – UIP Fault Messages (Continued) Address Message Meaning (Note) main-n, CP unknown For a function unit (FN) slot, an MXRVO or fn-{a,c}-n, OLIU CP is inserted in a slot provisioned for a ls-{a,c}-n, tg-n DS3 CP.
  • Page 488 TAP-104: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 12 of 38 Issue 9, April 1998 Table B – UIP Fault Messages (Continued) Address Message Meaning (Note) DS1 Freq Err *use CIT* Indicates that an incoming timing signal has an unacceptable frequency offset. Likely cause is a DS1 external timing reference to the local shelf or a remote shelf has a frequency offset greater than about 20|Hz.
  • Page 489 ISDN channel unit placement violation in slot #p of the distant terminal supported by the DT Server in slot #n of metallic distribution shelf [See document 363-205-004, SLC-2000 Multi-Services Distant Terminal (MSDT) Feature, User/Service and Ordering Manual , or document 363-206-301, DDM-2000...
  • Page 490 ISDN channel unit placement violation in DT supported by the DT Server in slot #n of metallic distribution shelf #m. [See document 363-205-004, SLC-2000 Multi-Services Distant Terminal (MSDT) Feature, User/Service and Ordering Manual , or document 363-206-301, DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer, Wideband/Narrowband Shelf, User/Service Manual , for more information.]...
  • Page 491 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-104 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 15 of 38 Table B – UIP Fault Messages (Continued) Address Message Meaning (Note) {m,a,c}-m-n STS1 BER For ring applications, the bit error ratio (BER) of the specified STS-1 signal exceeds the signal fail threshold (10 For VT1.5 path-switched rings, the system responds by inserting VT Path AIS in each...
  • Page 492 TAP-104: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 16 of 38 Issue 9, April 1998 Table B – UIP Fault Messages (Continued) Address Message Meaning (Note) — VT LOP **use CIT** There are one or more VT LOP conditions active in the SONET subsystem. The CIT must be used to obtain details.
  • Page 493 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-104 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 17 of 38 Table B – UIP Fault Messages (Continued) Address Message Meaning (Note) dt-m-n batt chrg fail PIU failure in DT supported alarm by the DT Server in slot #n of metallic distribution shelf #m. dt-m-n biu failed BIU failure in DT supported by the DT Server in slot...
  • Page 494 TAP-104: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 18 of 38 Issue 9, April 1998 Table B – UIP Fault Messages (Continued) Address Message Meaning (Note) dt-m-n data link fail Lost extended superframe (ESF) data link from DT v3tmc-m-n supported by the DT Server in slot #n of metallic v3eoc-m-n distribution shelf #m.
  • Page 495 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-104 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 19 of 38 Table B – UIP Fault Messages (Continued) Address Message Meaning (Note) — dup. GNE **use CIT* A shelf has been provisioned as a gateway network element (GNE) in a network that already has a GNE.
  • Page 496 TAP-104: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 20 of 38 Issue 9, April 1998 Table B – UIP Fault Messages (Continued) Address Message Meaning (Note) main-n, fn-{a,c}, force psw For an OC-3 line, the identified line is not selected ls-{a,c}-n as the active receiving line, and an automatic or manual protection switch to make this the active receiving line will not be done.
  • Page 497 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-104 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 21 of 38 Table B – UIP Fault Messages (Continued) Address Message Meaning (Note) — holdover mode The system is in holdover synchronization mode. Likely causes include the system was manually switched to holdover mode [with the CIT SONET subsystem command, switch-sync, or in a central office (CO) system, with a TBOS control point] and...
  • Page 498 TAP-104: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 22 of 38 Issue 9, April 1998 Table B – UIP Fault Messages (Continued) Address Message Meaning (Note) inc. DS3 LOS At least 128 consecutive zeros were detected in the DS3 signal received from the DSX-3. Likely causes include equipment failed or removed at DSX-3, or DS3 input disconnected at the DSX-3 or at the DDM-2000 backplane.
  • Page 499 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-104 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 23 of 38 Table B – UIP Fault Messages (Continued) Address Message Meaning (Note) inc. EC1 LOS The system has detected a loss-of-signal (LOS) condition on the EC-1 line. Likely causes include failure of the incoming signal or cable from the STSX-1, failure of the STS1E CP at the near end, or a cable disconnect at the STSX-1 or shelf connector.
  • Page 500 TAP-104: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 24 of 38 Issue 9, April 1998 Table B – UIP Fault Messages (Continued) Address Message Meaning (Note) cu-m-n incompat The circuit pack in channel unit slot #n on metallic distribution shelf #m is incompatible with the system configuration.
  • Page 501 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-104 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 25 of 38 Table B – UIP Fault Messages (Continued) Address Message Meaning (Note) tsi-n, bmp-n inh dly psw CORE nightly routining protection switching has been inhibited. This will occur if a CORE circuit pack has reset too many times, or if the CORE as a whole has failed to stay active for 24 hours, several days in a row.
  • Page 502 TAP-104: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 26 of 38 Issue 9, April 1998 Table B – UIP Fault Messages (Continued) Address Message Meaning (Note) env-n input active The specified environmental alarm point (miscellaneous discrete input) is active. The corresponding alarm message in the CIT alarm report is provisionable, so you must use the CIT to find out the meaning of this alarm.
  • Page 503 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-104 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 27 of 38 Table B – UIP Fault Messages (Continued) Address Message Meaning (Note) main-n, ls-c-n lockout prot. For an OC-3 line, the identified protection line is not selected as the active receiving line, and a protection switch to make this the active receiving line will not be allowed.
  • Page 504 TAP-104: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 28 of 38 Issue 9, April 1998 Table B – UIP Fault Messages (Continued) Address Message Meaning (Note) ls-a-n lost 51-MHz clock The VTU input clock has failed. Normally caused by an MXRV0 failure in the FUNCTION A slot, or a TGS failure.
  • Page 505 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-104 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 29 of 38 Table B – UIP Fault Messages (Continued) Address Message Meaning (Note) pdc, ls-a-n, tsi-n, pack init Software on the indicated circuit pack is being mdc-m-n, bmp-n, initialized and a self-test is being performed. A core-n transient condition and should not last for more than 5 minutes.
  • Page 506 TAP-104: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 30 of 38 Issue 9, April 1998 Table B – UIP Fault Messages (Continued) Address Message Meaning (Note) a-m-n rcvd DS1 AIS DS1 AIS is being received on the feeder DS1 signal #n on VTU/LIU #m. Likely causes are upstream network equipment or facility (upstream = towards the OC-3 feeder).
  • Page 507 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-104 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 31 of 38 Table B – UIP Fault Messages (Continued) Address Message Meaning (Note) cu-m-n stuck relay The test relay on channel unit (CU) #n on metallic distribution shelf #m is stuck. Try reseating the CU. If that does not clear the condition, replace the CU.
  • Page 508 TAP-104: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 32 of 38 Issue 9, April 1998 Table B – UIP Fault Messages (Continued) Address Message Meaning (Note) — system on battery The power minor alarm input is active, which indicates that the system is operating on battery reserve —...
  • Page 509 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-104 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 33 of 38 Table B – UIP Fault Messages (Continued) Note: For referenced CIT commands, those shown in lowercase are for the SONET subsystem, while those shown in uppercase are for the DLC subsystem. For PTUs, the system will report this condition if the PTU is failed or removed †...
  • Page 510 TAP-104: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 34 of 38 Issue 9, April 1998 Table C – UIP Alarm Messages Meaning Address Message — OC12 connector failed Failure or removal of the OC-12 faceplate connector (ribbon cable) which carries STS-1/STS-3c ring pass through traffic on the OC-12 ring interface on the OC-3 shelf.
  • Page 511 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-104 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 35 of 38 Table C – UIP Alarm Messages (Continued) Meaning Address Message site # acty There is at least one active alarm at the identified site. The SONET subsystem CIT alarm report should be used to obtain more details.
  • Page 512 TAP-104: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 36 of 38 Issue 9, April 1998 Table C – UIP Alarm Messages (Continued) Meaning Address Message main-n, fn-c inc. OC3 FERF The system has detected the OC-3 FERF signal in the incoming OC-3 signal. Likely causes include the far end detecting an incoming signal failure on the specified OC-3 line.
  • Page 513 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-104 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 37 of 38 Table C – UIP Alarm Messages (Continued) Meaning Address Message a-m-n rcvd DS1 YEL The far end is detecting a DS1 signal failure or DS1 AIS Likely causes include far-end signal failure or a near-end failure that is causing the system to transmit AIS.
  • Page 514 TAP-104: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 38 of 38 Issue 9, April 1998 Table C – UIP Alarm Messages (Continued) Meaning Address Message a-m-n trmt DS1 AIS DS1 AIS is being transmitted on the feeder DS1 signal #n on VTU/LIU #m. Likely causes are local failure in the DLC subsystem or non-cross-connected DS1.

  • Page 515: Access System

    363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-105 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 11 Clear Blown Fuse Trouble at a SLC ® -2000 Access System General: This procedure is used to help identify which SLC -2000 circuit packs are causing fuses to blow. It is assumed that a replacement fuse blows. Which assembly does the fuse power? If MDS, then continue with Step 2.
  • Page 516 TAP-105: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 2 of 11 Issue 9, April 1998 Does the fuse blow when the new PTU is installed? If YES, continue with Step 9. If NO, STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. Remove all circuit packs from the section powered by the blown fuse (Figure 1).
  • Page 517 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-105 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 11 13. Select a circuit pack to reinstall using the order shown in Table A. Table A – Order of Circuit Pack Reinstallation Order Circuit Pack Channel units (one at a time) 14.
  • Page 518 TAP-105: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 4 of 11 Issue 9, April 1998 20. Does the fault list show any channel unit failed? If YES, continue with Step 21. If NO, go to Step 24. 21. Replace any channel unit that is identified as failed in the RETRIEVE-FAULTS fault message list (DLP-500).
  • Page 519 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-105 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 11 32. Does the fuse blow? If NO, continue with Step 33. If YES, go to Step 34. 33. Have all PTUs been reinstalled in the system? If NO, return to Step 30. If YES, go to Step 45.
  • Page 520 TAP-105: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 6 of 11 Issue 9, April 1998 44. Does the fuse blow? If YES, continue with Step 45. If NO, go to Step 46. 45. If you still have a fuse problem, use local procedures to clear trouble. STOP.
  • Page 521 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-105 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 11 54. See Cautions and Notes. Remove the following circuit packs from their respective slots in the ARM shelf: • SYSCTL (see Caution 2 and Note 1) • TGS (1) •...
  • Page 522 TAP-105: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 8 of 11 Issue 9, April 1998 57. While performing this procedure, have you performed both Step 54 and Step If YES, continue with Step 58. If NO, go to Step 59. 58. The trouble is in the backplane. STOP.
  • Page 523 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-105 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 9 of 11 66. Replace the fuse. 67. Does the fuse blow? If NO, continue with Step 68. If YES, go to Step 81. 68. Reinstall the remaining circuit packs, if needed. STOP.
  • Page 524 TAP-105: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 10 of 11 Issue 9, April 1998 Table B – Order to Reinstall Circuit Packs Order Circuit Pack Special Instructions — Use SET-STATE-SMU:ENABLED UIP command to enable the SMU (DLP-500). Caution: To avoid interrupting service, make sure no manual conditions (manual/force/lockout) exist before enabling the SMU with the SET-STATE-SMU or...
  • Page 525 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-105 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 11 of 11 75. Do the fuses blow when the circuit pack is reinstalled? If NO, continue with Step 76. If YES, go to Step 77. 76. Have you reinstalled all circuit packs in the ARM shelf? If NO, return to Step 73.
  • Page 526 Use the rtrv-alm command to get a report of status and alarms. Table A provides a detailed description of these messages. NOTE: Refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , and use the rtrv-( ) commands to further isolate the far-end failure.
  • Page 527 SONET subsystem. For a list of the circuit pack access identifiers used by the SONET subsystem for CIT commands and reports, refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages . Go to Step 6.
  • Page 528 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-106 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 12 Table A – RTRV-ALM Message Descriptions Alarm Description Level Meaning AC power failed - FE The AC power supply to a remote terminal cabinet has failed. ACO active Status The parallel telemetry outputs and audible office alarms normally active due to the alarm conditions in the...
  • Page 529 TAP-106: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 4 of 12 Issue 9, April 1998 Table A – RTRV-ALM Message Descriptions (Continued) Alarm Description Level Meaning CP removed CR, MJ, or A CP previously installed in this system is removed. The CP should be replaced, or an "update" should be done to remove it from the system equipment list.
  • Page 530 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-106 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 12 Table A – RTRV-ALM Message Descriptions (Continued) Alarm Description Level Meaning excessive holdover The system has been in holdover mode for more than 4 hours. This may cause degraded performance (high error rates) on the transmitted and/or received signals.
  • Page 531 TAP-106: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 6 of 12 Issue 9, April 1998 Table A – RTRV-ALM Message Descriptions (Continued) Alarm Description Level Meaning The system is in holdover synchronization mode. Likely causes: The system was manually switched to holdover mode (with the switch-sync command, or, in a central office system, with TBOS control point 54) and the switch has not been reset;...
  • Page 532 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-106 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 12 Table A – RTRV-ALM Message Descriptions (Continued) Alarm Description Level Meaning The system is unable to frame on the DS1 synchronization reference signal. Likely causes: Upstream failure in the clock providing the reference signal.
  • Page 533 TAP-106: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 8 of 12 Issue 9, April 1998 Table A – RTRV-ALM Message Descriptions (Continued) Alarm Description Level Meaning The bit error ratio (BER) in the incoming DS3 signal CR, MJ, exceeds the provisioned failure threshold, 10 or 10 MN, or Likely causes: Failure of the upstream equipment or...
  • Page 534 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-106 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 9 of 12 Table A – RTRV-ALM Message Descriptions (Continued) Alarm Description Level Meaning The system has detected an incoming STS-1 alarm indication signal (AIS) in the active OC-3 line. The system responds by transmitting DS1 or DS3 AIS toward NE ACTY inc.
  • Page 535 TAP-106: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 10 of 12 Issue 9, April 1998 Table A – RTRV-ALM Message Descriptions (Continued) Alarm Description Level Meaning When associated with an OC-3 line, this message means that the identified line is not selected as the active receiving line, and a protection switch to make this the active receiving line will not be done.
  • Page 536 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-106 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 11 of 12 Table A – RTRV-ALM Message Descriptions (Continued) Alarm Description Level Meaning The specified DS1 CP is manually switched to protection. The manual switch will remain in effect until the protection switch is reset or until a failure occurs and manual switch an automatic switch preempts the manual switch.
  • Page 537 TAP-106: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 12 of 12 Issue 9, April 1998 Table A – RTRV-ALM Message Descriptions (Continued) Alarm Description Level Meaning When associated with the SYSCTL slot, this message means the CIT data rate or site switch settings on the unexpected CP switches SYSCTL CP are invalid, or that some of the unused switches are not in the off (down) position.
  • Page 538 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-107 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 7 Clear Customer Channel Failure Trouble Report at a SLC ® -2000 Access System Summary: This procedure clears customer service failures of the digital loop carrier (DLC) subsystem (single or multiple channels). It assumes that the trouble is at the SLC -2000 Access System and that the necessary actions (such as replacing central office channel units, running MLT channel tests, ...) have been done to isolate the trouble to the SLC -2000 RT.
  • Page 539 TAP-107: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 2 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 At the UIP, is the NE Activity or Attention LED lighted? If YES, continue with Step 2. If NO, go to Step 3. Go to TAP-104 and use the RETRIEVE-FAULTS command to identify which channel unit is bad.
  • Page 540 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-107 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 7 Did the drop distribution trouble clear? If YES, continue with Step 8. If NO, go to Step 10. Call the local test desk and request a channel test on the line/shelf in question and verify that the test passes and no faults appear at the RT after the test is completed.
  • Page 541 TAP-107: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 4 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 18. Press the PTU RESET button and check for customer service. 19. Do you have customer service? If NO, continue with Step 20. If YES, STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. 20.
  • Page 542 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-107 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 7 26. Do you have customer service? If YES, continue with Step 27. If NO, return to Step 24. 27. If needed, reinstall any remaining channel units. STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. 28.
  • Page 543 TAP-107: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 6 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 37. See Note. In the ARM shelf, replace the VTU/LIU that corresponds with the affected customer service (DLP-529). NOTE: There is no fixed mapping between VTUs or LIUs and MDCs in a TR303 system.
  • Page 544 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-107 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 7 46. Is local digital switch (LDS) provisioned correctly for TR-303 ISDN applications and clear of alarms? If YES, proceed to Step 48. If NO, continue with Step 47. 47.
  • Page 545 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-108 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 7 Clear Trouble During Program Upgrade at a SLC ® -2000 Access System Was the following prompt, Select "1" to continue. subsystem = printed indicating communication was established with near-end shelf? If NO, continue with Step 2.
  • Page 546 TAP-108: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 2 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 Are the connections and COM port configuration correct? If NO, go to Step 9. If YES, continue with Step 18. Make necessary corrections to the connections and/or COM port. STOP.
  • Page 547 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-108 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 7 17. Make the necessary corrections to the connections, baud rate, and/or COM port. STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. 18. Are you sure the PC is good and cable connections are correct? If YES, continue with Step 19.
  • Page 548 TAP-108: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 4 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: If PC disk errors occur during the software download, the terminal emulator (CTRM program) may print references to error numbers and the PC may print an error message such as: Disk error Abort, Retry, Ignore? If you have this trouble, you will need to repeat the generic installation procedure after determining why the PC failed (bad diskettes, bad...
  • Page 549 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-108 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 7 26. Did SYSCTL or OHCTL fail, indicated by the following or similar "SYSCTL CP failed" message? ins-prog: tid DENY SSTP /*Status, execution stopped.*/ /*Installation cannot be done because of SYSCTL test failure.
  • Page 550 TAP-108: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 6 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 31. Proceed as follows: And the If the new program program installation ... has ... Then do the following ... STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. Is completed —...
  • Page 551 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-108 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 7 32. See Caution and Note. Unplug and reseat SYSCTL to perform reset. CAUTION: If the old program is still running, removing the SYSCTL without performing a 10-second countdown sequence on the FE ID display (Note 1) may result in unexpected and undesirable protection switches, incorrect circuit pack fault indications, or incoming signal failure indications.

  • Page 552: High Density Optics Shelf (Hdos)

    (FITL) distribution equipment. The severity of alarms generated by a failure will depend on how many circuits are affected. This procedure is used only at the SLC -2000 site. Use document 363-205-004, SLC-2000 Multi-Services Distant Terminal (MSDT) Feature, User/Service Manual , at the SLC -2000 MSDT or document 363-206-301, DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer, Wideband/Narrowband Shelf, User/Service Manual , at the FiberReach narrowband shelf (NBS).
  • Page 553 TAP-109: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 Table A – UIP Alarm and Fault Messages Associated with FITL Distribution Mode (Notes) UIP Alarm Messages Severity Message Meaning MJ or MN {aid} rcvd FITL YEL Yellow alarm received from DT {aid} rcvd MISC MISC alarm received from DT {aid} on battery...
  • Page 554 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 Examine the DT Server channel unit alarms and perform trouble-clearing procedures in document 363-205-004, SLC-2000 Multi-Services Distant Terminal (MSDT) Feature, User/Service Manual , at the SLC -2000 MSDT location or document 363-206-301, DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer,...
  • Page 555 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-110 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 4 Clear Data Link Related Trouble Reports at a SLC ® -2000 Access System NOTE: In this procedure it is assumed that all alarms have been cleared in the RT using TAP-101 and that the data links at one time were operational.
  • Page 556 TAP-110: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 2 of 4 Issue 9, April 1998 • Layer 1. Layer 1 problems deal with errors that are more related to actual hardware problems or the data base not being correctly initialized. See TAP-101 to clear these problems. Is the span associated with the out-of-service data link out-of-service at the LDS? NOTE:...
  • Page 557 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-110 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 4 Are there any alarms or faults at the RT concerning the span (such as yellow or AIS alarm)? NOTE: See TAP-101 to determine correction of any span problems. If YES, then continue with Step 5.
  • Page 558 TAP-110: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 4 of 4 Issue 9, April 1998 10. Switch back to the original core. Use either the UIP SWITCH-CORE or CIT SW-TOPROT command to perform the switch. 11. Switch to the protection LIU/VTU. Place the data link in service using the LDS maintenance terminal.

  • Page 559: Clear Trouble With The Tollgrade Digital Dc Bypass Pair

    363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-111 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 1 Clear Trouble with the Tollgrade Digital DC Bypass Pair Channel Units Check the green synchronization LEDs on both the RT and D4 Tollgrade channel units. Are both LEDs on? If YES, go to Step 6.

  • Page 560: Clear Blown Fuse In The Mds Or Hdos Assembly During

    363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-112 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Clear Blown Fuse in the MDS or HDOS Assembly During Acceptance Testing Summary: Perform this procedure when fuses blow while installing circuit packs in the MDS or HDOS assembly during acceptance testing. If an MDS assembly fuse blows when a circuit pack is installed, replace the fuse.
  • Page 561 TAP-112: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 2 of 2 Issue 9, April 1998 Correct the wiring problem. STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. Contact your supervisor or technical assistance using your local procedures. STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE.

  • Page 562: Clear Lighted Ds1( ) Vtu/Liu Led During Mds Assembly Turnup

    363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-113 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Clear Lighted DS1( ) VTU/LIU LED During MDS Assembly Turnup CAUTION: Perform this procedure only during MDS assembly turnup. Clear other alarms using TAP-102. Are you connecting to an integrated network access (INA) system? If NO, continue with Step 2.
  • Page 563 TAP-113: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 Is the system configured for ring and/or VT1.5 taper configurations? If YES, continue with Step 9. If NO, go to Step 13. Verify that the proper VT1 cross-connections have been made at all SONET nodes.
  • Page 564 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-113 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 17. With the frame and line code format corrected, does the lighted LED go off? If NO, continue with Step 18. If YES, STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. 18.

  • Page 565: Clear Powering Trouble

    363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-114 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 4 Clear Powering Trouble Summary: Before trying to clear troubles at a SLC ® -2000 Access System, verify that AC power is present and that there are no tripped circuit breakers and no blown fuses in the power shelf, access resource manager (ARM) shelf, metallic distribution shelf (MDS) assemblies, and, if equipped, high-density optics shelf (HDOS).
  • Page 566 TAP-114: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 2 of 4 Issue 9, April 1998 Fuse location Metallic Distribution Shelf BDJ200 BDJ200 BDJ240 BDJ240 BDJ240 BDJ240 BDJ200 BDJ200 BDJ240 BDJ200 BDJ200 BDJ240 BDJ240 BDJ240 BDJ200 BDJ200 fuseloc.mds.ps Figure 2 – MDS Assembly Fuse Location High Density Optics Shelf AYB1B AYB1B...
  • Page 567 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-114 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 4 Did you find blown fuses in the system? If YES, continue with Step 3. If NO, go to Step 5. Replace blown fuses using WP-90247 fuse extractor tool or equivalent (Figure 4).
  • Page 568 TAP-114: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 4 of 4 Issue 9, April 1998 Press LED Test button on the UIP and verify that all LEDs and display elements on the UIP light (DLP-507). NOTE: Failure of the PDC circuit pack may prevent the LED test from lighting other SLC -2000 circuit pack LEDs.

  • Page 569: Clear Fault Led Lighted But Not Flashing

    363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-115 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 5 Clear FAULT LED Lighted But Not Flashing Summary: This procedure clears troubles on circuit packs when the FAULT LED is lighted continuously and not flashing. If the LED is flashing, go to TAP-116 to clear the trouble.
  • Page 570 TAP-115: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 2 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: FAULT LEDs of VTU packs do not flash when you are installing software; their FAULT LEDs remain lighted. Check for this condition by using the UIP RETRIEVE-FAULTS command. NOTE: PDC, TSI, BMP, MDC, VTU, and LIU packs will have lighted FAULT LEDs while the packs are completing initialization.
  • Page 571 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-115 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 5 Do other circuit packs contain lighted FAULT LEDs? If NO, STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. If YES, continue with Step 9. Using the order shown in Table A, select the next circuit pack that has the FAULT LED lighted to replace.
  • Page 572 TAP-115: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 4 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 Table A – Lighted FAULT LED Trouble Clearing Circuit Pack Special Instruction Details SYSCTL Press IPD/INT button within 10 seconds after the DLP-502 SYSCTL INITIALIZATION is displayed on the UIP. DLP-534 Note: If the letter C , P , or d appears on the SYSCTL FE ID display after the SYSCTL has been replaced,...
  • Page 573 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-115 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 5 Table A – Lighted FAULT LED Trouble Clearing (Continued) Circuit Pack Special Instruction Details Use the SWITCH-CORE UIP command to force the DLP-528 other CORE active before removing a BMP with ACTIVE LED lighted.

  • Page 574: Clear Flashing Fault Led(S)

    363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-116 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 6 Clear Flashing FAULT LED(s) Summary: This procedure clears troubles on circuit packs that have flashing FAULT LEDs only. If the LED is on and not flashing, go to TAP-115 to clear the trouble. A flashing FAULT LED on an interface circuit pack (such as a DS1 or OLIU) indicates that the circuit pack has lost the input signal or the input signal has unacceptable errors in it.
  • Page 575 TAP-116: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 2 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 Determine which circuit pack has a flashing FAULT LED and proceed as follows: If circuit pack FAULT LED is flashing ... Then go to ... Step 2 Step 6 TSI, BMP, MDC, LIU, PDC Step 11 OHCTL...
  • Page 576 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-116 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 6 10. Switch service from the protection DS1 circuit pack to the service DS1 circuit pack. STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. 11. Use the UIP RETRIEVE-FAULTS command to see if a software installation is in progress.
  • Page 577 TAP-116: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 4 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 19. Is a new software generic being downloaded to the SYSCTL at the far-end terminal (program upgrade)? If NO, continue with Step 20. If YES, STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. NOTE: It is normal for the FAULT LED on the near-end OHCTL to flash if a program installation is being performed to a far-end SYSCTL.
  • Page 578 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-116 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 6 30. Did the FAULT LED on the OHCTL stop flashing? If NO, continue with Step 31. If YES, STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. 31. Clear problem using local procedures. STOP.
  • Page 579 TAP-116: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 6 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 42. Replace the near-end OHCTL (DLP-501). 43. Did the FAULT LED on the OHCTL stop flashing? If NO, continue with Step 44. If YES, STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. 44.

  • Page 580: Clear Brownout Condition - Flashing Letter "L" In Sysctl Fe Id Display

    363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-117 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Clear Brownout Condition — Flashing Letter "L" in SYSCTL FE ID Display Summary: This procedure clears trouble on a SLC ® -2000 Access System shelf that is experiencing a low-voltage condition (brownout) as indicated by the flashing letter "L"...
  • Page 581 TAP-117: Trouble Clearing 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 CAUTION: If fuse on UIP is not blown, trouble may be a failure of one of the − 48 V DC power feeders. Removing the wrong fuse or disconnecting the wrong feeder for power measurement will cause service interruption.
  • Page 582 363-208-001 Trouble Clearing: TAP-117 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 13. Is trouble cleared? If YES, then STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. If NO, then continue with Step 14. CAUTION: Replacing the SYSCTL involves updating the internal memory on the circuit pack.

  • Page 583: Check 4A, 4B, Or 4G Fan Unit Operation

    363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: Contents-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Contents of This Tab Perform Commands from the User Interface Panel ....DLP-500 Install OHCTL Circuit Pack.
  • Page 584 Contents-000: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 Connect SLC ® -2000 Access System to Ring Optical Facility ..DLP-519 SONET Ring or Taper Cross-Connect Philosophy ....DLP-520 Connect CIT and Establish Session (Releases 3.1, 3.2, and 3.3) .
  • Page 585 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: Contents-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 Convert a Conventional SLC ® -2000 FITL System (768 Lines) with HDOS to a DLC R4.5 or Later Enhanced FITL System (1,152 Lines) ..........DLP-539 Convert a Conventional SLC ®...
  • Page 586 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-500 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 8 Perform Commands from the User Interface Panel Overview: The user interface panel (UIP) has a 24-character alphanumeric message display (AMD). The purpose of the UIP AMD is to allow the craft personnel to perform basic system functions without the need for a craft interface terminal (CIT) being connected to the system.
  • Page 587 DLP-500: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 A choice is made by pressing Enter ( <ent> ) when the desired item is displayed. NOTE: The display is normally off and has a 90-minute time-out after a command is done or an automatic message is printed.
  • Page 588 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-500 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 8 Other aspects associated with commands are as follows: • Confirmation Message — CONFIRM? Y<ent> N<esc> Some commands require you to press the Enter button to confirm your choice before executing.
  • Page 589 DLP-500: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 4 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 Table A – UIP Commands Description of Command Description User Options MAIN MENU Lists the system commands. Use the Scroll Menu up and down buttons until the desired item is displayed, then press Enter to choose or confirm...
  • Page 590 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-500 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 8 Table A – UIP Commands (Continued) Description of Command Description User Options RETRIEVE-STATE Returns the states of VRTs 1 through 8 per Use Scroll Menu VTU (12—34—56—78) with i (in service) or buttons to scan - (out of service).
  • Page 591 DLP-500: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 6 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 Table A – UIP Commands (Continued) Description of Command Description User Options SET-STATE-SMU Enables or disables the software installation Use Scroll Menu feature in the SMU. buttons to view menu and enter to confirm your choice.
  • Page 592 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-500 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 8 Table B – UIP Commands (Menus and Submenus) User Options Command Menu Submenu (Note) MAIN MENU — — Scroll RETRIEVE-FAULTS — — Enter or Escape RETRIEVE-ALARMS — —...
  • Page 593 DLP-500: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 8 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 Table B – UIP Commands (Menus and Submenus) (Continued) User Options Command Menu Submenu (Note) SET-NE SET-NE:RT — Enter SET-NE:COT Escape SET-STATE-SMU ENABLED — Enter DISABLED Escape SWITCH-CORE RESET —...
  • Page 594 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-501 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 6 Install OHCTL Circuit Pack Is the BBG7 or BBG9 OHCTL being installed? If BBG7, go to Step 3. If BBG9, continue with Step 2. NOTE: A BBG9 OHCTL must have software installed and it must be compatible with the software in the BBG8 SYSCTL.
  • Page 595 DLP-501: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: Switches S1-1, S1-2, and S1-3 on the OHCTL set the network element number of the shelf. The network element number and the site ID (set on the SYSCTL) form a unique address for a shelf at a site.
  • Page 596 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-501 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 6 NOTE: Note that factory settings for switch S2 are: • S2-1: ON • S2-2: OFF • S2-3: OFF • S2-4: OFF. This will permit the establishment of a linear/hub system without changing any S2 switch settings except on the OHCTL at the CO.
  • Page 597 DLP-501: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 4 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 Edge Connector Component Side Figure 1 – OHCTL Option Switch Install the OHCTL. NOTE: When the OHCTL is installed, the FAULT LED will light and remain lighted until the SYSCTL is installed. STOP.
  • Page 598 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-501 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 6 OHCTL Switch S2 OHCTL Switch S2 OHCTL Switch S2 S2-1 S2-2 S2-3 S2-1 S2-2 S2-3 S2-4 S2-3 S2-4 S2-1 S2-2 S2-4 MAIN (FN A) (FN B) MAIN (FN A) (FN B) (FN C)
  • Page 599 DLP-501: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 6 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 (Node 1) (Node 2) OHCTL Switch S2 OHCTL Switch S2 S2-1 S2-2 S2-3 S2-4 S2-1 S2-2 S2-3 S2-4 (MAIN 1) (MAIN 2) (FN B) (FN C) (MAIN 1) (MAIN 2) (FN B) (FN C) MAIN 1...
  • Page 600 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-502 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 11 Install or Replace BBG5 SYSCTL Ensure that the BBG7 OHCTL is installed (DLP-501). CAUTION: Take care to avoid damaging the LED(s) that protrude through the openings in the faceplate of the circuit packs during handling and circuit pack installation.
  • Page 601 DLP-502: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 11 Issue 9, April 1998 Using office records, work order, or other local company information, set the option switches to the correct positions as follows: • S1-1, S1-2, S1-3: TBOS Display Number •...
  • Page 602 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-502 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 11 Read all of Step 5 before installing the SYSCTL. Install the SYSCTL circuit pack and proceed as follows: If SYSCTL indicates... Then ... Compatible software After about 20 seconds, the SYSCTL FAULT LED goes off and the OHCTL FAULT LED cycles on and off.
  • Page 603 DLP-502: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 4 of 11 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: If this is the first pair of plug-ins being installed in the SONET subsystem, ignore all alarms on the user interface panel. STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. See Caution.
  • Page 604 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-502 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 11 NOTE: The data rate for front access with the CIT is selected by option switches S3-1, S3-2, and S3-3 and is set for 9,600 baud (the recommended CIT rate to download software).
  • Page 605 DLP-502: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 6 of 11 Issue 9, April 1998 10. Using office records, work order, or other local company information, set the option switches to the correct positions: • S1-1, S1-2, S1-3: TBOS Display Number • S2-1, S2-2, S2-3: Site ID number •...
  • Page 606 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-502 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 11 NOTE: You have only 10 seconds to press the SYSCTL UPD/INIT button and initialize the system while SYSCTL INITIALIZATION is displayed on the UIP display. It may take up to 30 seconds for SYSCTL INITIALIZATION to be displayed on the UIP display after the SYSCTL is installed.
  • Page 607 DLP-502: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 8 of 11 Issue 9, April 1998 18. Sectionalize the problem as follows: And the FAULT LED on If SYSCTL FE either the SYSCTL or ID displays ... OHCTL... Then ... — Determine if you want to "force" the present version software to run.
  • Page 608 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-502 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 9 of 11 NOTE: Compatible software must be installed in both the BBG7 OHCTL and the BBG5 SYSCTL. When the SYSCTL is installed, if software is not installed or is not compatible, the letter C, P, or d will be displayed in the FE ID display.
  • Page 609 DLP-502: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 10 of 11 Issue 9, April 1998 Table A – BBG5 SYSCTL Switch S1 (Note) TBOS Display Number TBOS Backup Number CO/RT Select Display S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 Backup S1-4 S1-5 Value S1-6 Primary Secondary Normal Remote TBOS No TBOS...
  • Page 610 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-502 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 11 of 11 Table C – BBG5 SYSCTL Switch S3 (Note) CIT Front Access Data Rate CIT Rear Access Data Rate PMN Alarm Baud S3-1 S3-2 S3-3 Baud S3-4 S3-5 S3-6 Alarm S3-7...
  • Page 611 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-503 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 5 Install TGS Circuit Packs Summary: The SLC ® -2000 Access System requires free running (S1-3 ON, S1-4 ON, [S1-5 OFF on the BBF2B TGS]) when it is optically looped back. All modes of timing are supported with the SLC -2000 Access System.
  • Page 612 DLP-503: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 Using the work order, Figure 1, Tables A, B, C, and D, set the other option switches on both TGS circuit packs. NOTE: See your local company documentation for specific option settings. In some cases, special arrangements have been made with specific companies to include their option settings as an appendix to this document.
  • Page 613 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-503 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 5 Table A – BBF2/BBF2B TGS Line Code and Frame Format DS1 Line Code S1-1 DS1 Frame Format S1-2 B8ZS Table B – BBF2 TGS Timing Mode Timing Mode S1-3 S1-4 Free Running...
  • Page 614 DLP-503: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 4 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 Table D – BBF2B TGS Equalizer Switch Equalization S2-1 S2-2 S2-3 0' to 131' >131' to 262' >262' to 393' >393' to 524' >524' to 655' Invalid Invalid Invalid See Caution.
  • Page 615 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-503 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 5 Install the second (protection) TGS circuit pack in TGS (2) slot. Response: FAULT LED on TGS lights and goes off within 1 minute. ACTIVE LED remains off. See Note.
  • Page 616 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-504 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 4 Install OLIU Plug-Ins with Optical Fibers Not Connected CAUTION: Open optical connectors may emit invisible laser radiation. Do not view beam with optical instruments. Avoid direct exposure to the beam. CAUTION: Performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure.
  • Page 617 DLP-504: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 4 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: It is assumed that the loss of the optical facility is known from office records or that a measurement has been made. When first turning up the SONET subsystem, the OLIUs will be looped back until end-to-end spans are established.
  • Page 618 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-504 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 4 CAUTION: If optical fiber cables are in the tray beneath the OLIUs, be careful not to pinch or crush the fibers when the OLIUs are inserted. NOTE: The red FAULT LED flashes when no signal is present.
  • Page 619 DLP-504: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 4 of 4 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: When the second 24G-U OLIU is seated in the MAIN 2(P) slot, an OC12 connector failed alarm will occur. Normally, the alarm occurs because the OC-12 faceplate ribbon connector is not installed. To clear the alarm, install the OC-12 faceplate ribbon connector on the 24G-U OLIUs seated in the MAIN 1 and MAIN 2 slots.
  • Page 620 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-505 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Connect Optical Loop CAUTION: Open optical connectors may emit invisible laser radiation. Do not view beam with optical instruments. Avoid direct exposure to the beam. CAUTION: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure.
  • Page 621 DLP-505: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 Refer to Figure 1 and set the option switch on the 21G/21G-U OLIU to the LOW POWER position, if not already performed. Edge Connector HIGH POWER I or III POWER Component Side Figure 1 –...
  • Page 622 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-505 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 NOTE: It may take up to 3-1/2 minutes for the FAULT LEDs to stop flashing after loopback is made, depending on the setting of the signal degrade threshold.
  • Page 623 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-506 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Clean Optical Fibers, Connectors, and Lightguide Build-Outs CAUTION: Open optical connectors may emit invisible laser radiation. Do not view beam with optical instruments. Avoid direct exposure to beam. NOTE: Disconnect and clean only one set of connectors at a time when cleaning internal OLIU connectors.
  • Page 624 DLP-506: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 Install ST connectors onto coupling by aligning mark on rim of connector body with slot in coupling. Push connector onto coupling with clockwise twist-locking motion. STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. Remove lightguide build-out from OUT connector on 23G OLIU.
  • Page 625 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-506 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 CAUTION: Attenuated lightguide build-out has lens. Do not use pipe cleaner. Clean lightguide build-out by canned air only. Blow any lint or dust from inside lightguide build-out using canned air duster 3 inches from lightguide build-out. STOP.
  • Page 626 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-507 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 4 Perform LED Test Press the LED Test button on the user interface panel (UIP). Response: All LEDs on circuit packs except ITH and channel units installed in the SLC ®...
  • Page 627 DLP-507: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 4 Issue 9, April 1998 Did all of the LEDs in the SLC -2000 fail to light? If YES, then proceed to Step 6. If NO, then continue with Step 4. CAUTION: Replacement plug-ins may have option switches which must be properly set before the plug-in is installed.
  • Page 628 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-507 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 4 CAUTION: Removing the SYSCTL without performing a 10-second countdown sequence on the FE ID display (Note 1) may result in unexpected and undesirable protection switches, incorrect circuit pack fault indications, or incoming signal failure indications.
  • Page 629 DLP-507: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 4 of 4 Issue 9, April 1998 11. Replace the PDC and repeat the LED test. 12. Did the LED test fail again? If YES, then continue with Step 13. If NO, then STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. CAUTION: Replacing the SYSCTL involves updating the internal memory on the plug-in.
  • Page 630 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-508 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Perform Automatic Local Transmission Test General: This command will always fail for SONET ring configurations. Do not do this DLP for SONET ring configurations. CAUTION: Open optical connectors may emit invisible laser radiation. Do not view beam with optical instruments.
  • Page 631 DLP-508: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 Refer to DLP-505 and install OLIU optical loops, if not already installed. See Figure 1. OLIU Multiplexing direction Local fiber loopback Internal test signal Monitor Demultiplexing direction Figure 1 –...
  • Page 632 In addition to the Auto-Turnup Report , a circuit pack LED indicator will light if the circuit pack has failed. See document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages Manual , for more details of the test-auto command. Did all tests pass? If YES, then STOP.
  • Page 633 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-509 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Test the SONET Feeder Protection Switching Function To test a high-speed switch to protection, unplug an MXRVO plug-in with a lighted ACTIVE LED. NOTE: The green ACTIVE LED on the companion plug-in lights. The Critical or Major and NE Activity LEDs on the UIP light.
  • Page 634 DLP-509: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 For point-to-point or taper configurations, remove and immediately reconnect the upper IN fiber from one OLIU. Wait for the red FAULT LED to stop flashing. Did the green ACTIVE LED go off on the OLIU? If NO, continue with Step 7.
  • Page 635 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-509 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 11. Remove and immediately reconnect the upper IN fiber from one of the OLIUs. NOTE: Both OLIUs are always active for ring configurations. 12. Verify that the Critical alarm does not light. 13.
  • Page 636 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-510 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 4 Install DS1/DS1PM Low-Speed Interface Plug-Ins CAUTION: Take care to avoid damaging the LEDs that protrude through the opening in the faceplate of the DS1/DS1PM. NOTE: Switch 1, sections 1 through 3 (S1-1, S1-2, S1-3) are set according to the length of DS1 cabling between the SLC ®...
  • Page 637 DLP-510: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 4 Issue 9, April 1998 Table A – DS1/DS1PM Cable LBO Settings Switch S1 Settings 613C (608C) Cable 1249C Cable Other Cable dB Length (Feet) Length (Feet) Loss at 772 kHz S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 0 to 133...
  • Page 638 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-510 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 4 Positions 4 through 7 select DS1 line coding for channels 1 through 4. ON selects AMI, OFF selects B8ZS. Edge Connector Component Side Figure 1 – DS1/DS1PM Option Settings NOTE: If the response is not correct when the DS1/DS1PM plug-in is installed, check option switch setting.
  • Page 639 DLP-510: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 4 of 4 Issue 9, April 1998 Obtain the proper protection circuit pack (see Note). NOTE: If BBF3 DS1PM circuit packs are installed in service slots, then a BBF3 DS1PM circuit pack must be installed in the protection slot, if protection is required.
  • Page 640 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-511 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 4 Connect SLC ® -2000 Access System to Point-to-Point or Taper/Drop Optical Facility CAUTION: Open optical connectors may emit invisible laser radiation. Do not view beam with optical instruments. Avoid direct exposure to the beam. CAUTION: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure.
  • Page 641 DLP-511: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 4 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: The optical connector labeled OUT is the output from the OLIU. The connector labeled IN is the input to the OLIU. NOTE: For 21G/21G-U and 22F OLIUs, the output connections MUST be made using single-mode optical jumpers.
  • Page 642 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-511 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 4 At both ends, connect the other optical pair jumper to the OLIU 1 IN or OUT connector as required. Response: OLIU 1 FAULT LED stops flashing and the ACTIVE LED must light within 4 minutes.
  • Page 643 Minor, Attention, and NE Activity alarms]. You can use Circuit Order: NTP-062, Discontinue Service at a SLC-2000 Remote Terminal , to remove service from the SLC -2000 system. It is recommended that the Function Groups at both ends be equipped the same (empty slots, or equipped DS1 slots) when establishing the OC-3 network.
  • Page 644 Far-end communications (fecom) must be enabled at both shelves in the optical span being tested. See SET-FECOM in document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages . At each end of the optical span being tested, ensure that both the service and protection OLIUs (slots 1 and 2) have been connected to the optical facility (a total of four connections at each end of the span).
  • Page 645 In addition to the Auto-Turnup Report , a circuit pack LED indicator will light if the circuit pack has failed. See document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for more details of the test-auto command. Did all tests pass? If YES, then STOP.
  • Page 646 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-512 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 Perform the following to clear optics test trouble: Replace any OLIU that has the FAULT LED lighted. A flashing FAULT indicates that the near-end receiver, far-end transmitter, or incoming (receive) fiber has failed.
  • Page 647 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-513 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 9 Install New SONET Generic Program New Shelf Installation Only General: This procedure is intended to be used at a SLC ® -2000 Access System local network element only when a SYSCTL and OHCTL with the proper version generic cannot be obtained.
  • Page 648 DLP-513: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 9 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: If you are upgrading to SONET R6.2.1 linear or R7.2.1 rings or later, the OHCTL version, as shown on the front of the circuit pack, should be S2:4A or later. Observe one of the following indications on the SYSCTL FE ID display.
  • Page 649 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-513 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 9 If necessary, connect the CIT to the SLC -2000 RT using the procedure in DLP-521 or DLP-525 (local access) or DLP-541 (remote access). Obtain working copies of the new system generic program diskette(s) and the Software Release Description for the software being installed.
  • Page 650 DLP-513: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 4 of 9 Issue 9, April 1998 Execute the command checkpgm to check the version number of the program you are installing. This command may take up to 15 minutes to run and may require swapping diskettes in the disk drive if the software is on a floppy disk drive.
  • Page 651 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-513 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 9 NOTE: The CIT response from a SLC -2000 system is different than the response from a DDM-2000 system. Enter? or RETURN. Response: PC prompts with: /* Enter a "1" to proceed */ subsystem = 13.
  • Page 652 DLP-513: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 6 of 9 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: If the SYSCTL display shows a P, the system will display In Progress..In this case, you will not enter the ins-prog command to start program installation. Wait until the program installation is complete for this shelf.
  • Page 653 NOTE: After the system prompt (login <), the system will respond normally to commands entered. Document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , gives a description of the commands. Use rtrv-nmap command to retrieve the name (tid) of the near-end shelf having new program installed.
  • Page 654 DLP-513: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 8 of 9 Issue 9, April 1998 21. Was response correct? If YES, then continue with Step 22. If NO, then do Trouble Clearing: TAP-108. 22. Enter a "y" or "yes" and a carriage return to continue with software installation.
  • Page 655 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-513 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 9 of 9 When the generic SONET software is loading at the SLC -2000 system, you will notice the following: Response: The PC starts download and displays the following message: In progress .
  • Page 656 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-514 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 5 Check 4A, 4B, and 4G Fan Unit Operation Summary: Figure 1 shows the fan unit and its indicators. Table A describes the major differences between the three fan units. The A- and B-type units have a built-in 991A fan controller circuit pack.
  • Page 657 DLP-514: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: The 4A- and 4B-type units will start operating if the temperature is +10°C (+50°F) or higher and power is supplied. The fans will not turn off until the temperature is −10°C (+14°F) or less.
  • Page 658 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-514 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 5 10. Sectionalize the trouble as follows: If your unit is a ... And ... Then ... 4A or 4B The control circuit pack The thermal sensor may have failed. Check the voltage between TEMP + and –...
  • Page 659 DLP-514: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 4 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 Look through here to see red, yellow, and green LED indicators. 814067.eps Figure 1 – Fan Unit and Control Circuit Pack...
  • Page 660 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-514 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 5 Table A – Fan Unit Types Operating Shutoff Thermal Controller Airflow Type Temperature Temperature Sensor Alarm Environment Circuit Pack Direction +10°C (+50°F) outdoor 991A Exhaust is −10°C low speed cabinet out front...
  • Page 661 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-515 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 5 Test Single-Party POTS Channel End to End Summary: At the central office (CO) equipment, determine channel and directory number of channel being tested. At remote terminal (RT), determine corresponding channel and install single-party channel unit.
  • Page 662 DLP-515: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 Is dial tone present at RT? If YES, then proceed to Step 9. If NO, then continue with Step 6. Request CO personnel to review line assignment to ensure correct test number.
  • Page 663 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-515 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 5 16. Has tip and ring reversal been checked? If YES, then continue with Step 17. If NO, then proceed to Step 18. 17. Replace RT channel unit and repeat this procedure from Step 4. 18.
  • Page 664 DLP-515: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 4 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 30. At RT, use appropriate SD drawings to check MDS wiring. Repeat the procedure from Step 24 after locating and correcting the trouble. 31. Is this the last designated channel unit slot to be tested? If YES, then continue with Step 32.
  • Page 665 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-515 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 5 40. Is this the last designated channel unit slot to be tested with MLT? If YES, then continue with Step 41. If NO, then repeat from Step 33. 41.
  • Page 666 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-516 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Perform Automatic DSX Transmission Test CAUTION: This command will interrupt service and should only be performed before any DS1 services are established. At the DSX panel, install patch cord loopbacks for all DS1 channels. Comment: DS1 circuit pack FAULT LEDs will flash if the loopbacks are not installed.
  • Page 667 DLP-516: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 2 Issue 9, April 1998 Did all tests pass? If YES, remove all DSX loopbacks and press UIP UPDATE , then STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. If NO, then continue with Step 4. NOTE: During the test, any failure will be indicated by a flashing FAULT LED on the affected plug-in.
  • Page 668 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-517 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 4 Change Site ID, Network Element Address, Target Identification (TID), or TBOS Display Number SONET system node equipment in the network is identified by a site address (what location) and a network element address (what shelf at the site).
  • Page 669 DLP-517: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 4 Issue 9, April 1998 To change a site address or TBOS display number using the switches on the BBG5 SYSCTL circuit pack, press the user interface panel ACO and the SYSCTL FE SEL buttons at the same time. Remove the SYSCTL before the 10-second countdown reaches 1 as displayed on the SYSCTL.
  • Page 670 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-517 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 4 Table A – BBG5 SYSCTL TBOS Display Number, Site ID, and Shelf ID (Note) TBOS # S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 Site ID S2-1 S2-2 S2-3 Shelf ID S2-4 S2-5 S2-6 ®...
  • Page 671 DLP-517: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 4 of 4 Issue 9, April 1998 Table B – BBG7 OHCTL Switch 1 (S1) Network Element Number Switch S1 Network Element S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 Invalid Invalid Invalid Example Network Element ID # (1 through 5) To select a network element ID number 1 through 5,...
  • Page 672 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-518 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Install or Replace the User Interface Display Panel General: The user interface display panel (UIP) is attached to the access resource manager (ARM) shelf with three snap hooks (top, left, and right sides) and a button-type connection on the bottom.
  • Page 673 DLP-518: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 Snap lock holes Ground screw hole J256 Run ground wire through here to Oval hole J214 left side of for screw J254 assembly Front Left side tpa 821244/01 Figure 1 –...
  • Page 674 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-518 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 J256 (20 pin) Snap hooks J214 (24 pin) J254 (3 pin) Ground wire tpa 821243/01 Figure 2 – UIP Display Panel Ground Wire Connection to the ARM Shelf Slide the UIP into place and verify the snap hooks on the top, left, and right sides of the UIP connect to the ARM shelf.
  • Page 675 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-519 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 5 Connect SLC ® -2000 Access System to Ring Optical Facility CAUTION: Open optical connectors may emit invisible laser radiation. Do not view beam with optical instruments. Avoid direct exposure to the beam. CAUTION: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure.
  • Page 676 DLP-519: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: The optical connector labeled OUT is the output from the OLIU. The connector labeled IN is the input to the OLIU. NOTE: For 22-type OLIUs, the output connections MUST be made using single-mode optical jumpers.
  • Page 677 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-519 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 5 NOTE: This procedure requires that only ONE OLIU (MAIN 1 at one end, MAIN 2 at the other end of the optical span) is to be unlooped at a time (to simulate a closed ring).
  • Page 678 DLP-519: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 4 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 When the SLC -2000 RT is connected to the network, you may Comment: have a Major alarm and a FAULT LED lighted on the SYSCTL and/or OHCTL caused by a duplicated site/ne address, TBOS display, or TID.
  • Page 679 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-519 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 5 Did the OLIU FAULT LEDs go off? If NO, then proceed to Step 10. If YES, then continue with Step 9. Verify that the optical fiber cables are placed correctly in the fiber tray and properly routed in the bay framework.
  • Page 680 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-520 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 14 SONET Ring or Taper Cross-Connect Philosophy CAUTION: Mistakes made when entering cross-connections after a SONET system has been turned up "raw" (with default or no cross-connections made) are the most difficult troubles to identify.
  • Page 681 4.0 or higher, or DLP-541 for remote CIT access). Use rtrv-nmap command to retrieve a map of the SONET subsystem (refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages ) and identify target identification (TID) system names. Use the rtrv-crs-sts1 or rtrv-crs-vt1 command at each node to retrieve a cross-connect map.
  • Page 682 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-520 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 14 NOTE: You must know the TID name (see Step 1) for each node. At the first SLC -2000 system node, enter the following CIT commands: • ent-crs-sts1:m-1,a; •...
  • Page 683 DLP-520: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 4 of 14 Issue 9, April 1998 Setting Up a VT1 Taper For VT1.5 taper configurations, the OC-3 signal enters the SLC -2000 in 22F OLIU slots MAIN 1 and MAIN 2. MAIN 1 exits (down steam to the next node) through 22F OLIUs in Function Group C slots 1 and 2 to the next SONET node.
  • Page 684 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-520 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 14 VT1 Taper Example 2 (Full System) In this example it is assumed a seven-node SONET system, one CO DDM-2000 service node, and six mixed mode SLC -2000 customer access drop nodes are used. It assumes multiplexer group 1 (CO DDM-2000 Function Group A) is used at the first and second SLC -2000 RT nodes, multiplexer group 2 (CO DDM-2000 Function Group B) is used at the third and fourth SLC -2000 RT nodes, and multiplexer group 3...
  • Page 685 DLP-520: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 6 of 14 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: You must know the TID name (see Step 1) for each node so you can remotely log in (rlgn:tid=x) to other nodes and enter cross-connections. NOTE: You will generate alarms until you complete all through, drop, and add cross-connections.
  • Page 686 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-520 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 14 Establish cross-connections for multiplexer group x (1, 2, or 3). The ent-crs-vt1 has the syntax " from SONET address " to " through or add/drop address. " Comment: If the "all"...
  • Page 687 DLP-520: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 8 of 14 Issue 9, April 1998 • At the second multiplexer group RT (one Mode 1 and four Mode 2), make the following drop cross-connections (read the Comment in the previous step): ent-crs-vt1:m- x -5-all,a-1-all; ent-crs-vt1:m- x -6-all,a-3-all;...
  • Page 688 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-520 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 9 of 14 VT1 Taper Example 3 (Add a Mode 2 DLC System) In this example it is assumed a three or more SONET node system (see "VT1.5 Taper Example 2"), one CO DDM-2000 service node, and at least one SLC -2000 customer access drop node somewhere in the taper SONET system are used.
  • Page 689 DLP-520: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 10 of 14 Issue 9, April 1998 VT1 Ring Example 4 (Add a Mode 1 DLC System) In this example it is assumed a three or more SONET node system, one CO DDM-2000 service node and at least one SLC -2000 customer access drop node are used.
  • Page 690 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-520 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 11 of 14 Node 1 Node 2 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 MAIN 2 MAIN 1 Ring 1 Ring 2 MXRVO m-1-2-3 to m-1-2-3 pass through connection a-2-3 to m-1-2-3 where: a-2-3 = address of DS1 port 3, circuit pack 2 in group A m-1-2-3 = address of STS#1.
  • Page 691 DLP-520: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 12 of 14 Issue 9, April 1998 VT1 Ring Example 5 (Full System) In this example it is assumed a seven-node SONET system, one CO DDM-2000 service node and six mixed mode SLC -2000 customer access drop nodes are used. It assumes multiplexer group 1 (CO DDM-2000 Function Group A) is used at the first and second SLC -2000 RT nodes, multiplexer group 2 (CO DDM-2000 Function Group B) is used at the third and fourth SLC -2000 RT nodes, and multiplexer group 3...
  • Page 692 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-520 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 13 of 14 NOTE: You must know the TID name (see Step 1) for each node so you can remotely log in (rlgn:tid=x) to other nodes and enter cross-connections. NOTE: You will generate alarms until you complete all through, drop, and add cross-connections.
  • Page 693 DLP-520: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 14 of 14 Issue 9, April 1998 Through connections ent-crs-vt1:m- x -5-all,m- x -5-all; ent-crs-vt1:m- x -6-all,m- x -6-all; ent-crs-vt1:m- x -7-all,m- x -7-all; • At the second multiplexer group RT (one Mode 1 and four Mode 2), make the following drop and through cross-connections: Drop connections ent-crs-vt1:m- x -5-all,a-1-all;...
  • Page 694 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-521 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 6 Connect CIT and Establish Session (Releases 3.1, 3.2, and 3.3) General: This procedure is intended to be used at the SLC ® -2000 remote terminal (RT) to connect a craft interface terminal (CIT) and log in to the SONET or digital loop carrier (DLC) subsystem.
  • Page 695 ASCII terminal. Comment: Refer to the "Ordering" chapter in document 363-208-000, SLC-2000 Access System, Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide , for a partial summary of compatible CIT terminals, PCs, and modems. RS-232 cable to connect PC Serial port to user interface panel CIT port.
  • Page 696 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-521 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 6 Press the cover of the UIP to gain access to the CIT port. Connect CIT terminal to CIT port by connecting one end of an RS-232 cable to the COM1 port of the CIT (use a 9-pin to 25-pin converter, if necessary) and the other end of the cable to the user interface panel (UIP) CIT port (see Figure 1).
  • Page 697 DLP-521: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 4 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 Turn on the CIT and set the terminal parameters as follows (consult your terminal manual for setup procedures): • Full duplex. • 8 data bits. • 1 start bit. •...
  • Page 698 • To change back to the SONET subsystem at any time, enter SON at the prompt. Refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for available commands. To end a CIT session, enter logout and disconnect the CIT.
  • Page 699 DLP-521: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 6 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 These commands can be executed in two ways, " expert " or " prompted ". The expert , or " command" mode, syntax allows you to enter all parameters with a one-line command.
  • Page 700 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-522 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Establish Standard T1 Cross-Connections Are you installing cross-connections for a TR-08 system or a TR-303 system? If TR-08 system, continue with Step 2. If TR-303 system, go to Step 5. Comment: See the section on TR-08 and TR-303 cross-connections in Chapter 4 of this manual (before the TOPs section).
  • Page 701 This command will cross-connect all 28 physical DS1s to all 28 logical DS1s on the TR-303 VRT. For other cross-connect configurations, refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for information on CIT commands. STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE.
  • Page 702 ® -2000 Access System equipped with the R4.5 enhanced FiberReach/DT feature. For more detail, refer to Chapter 3, “System Configurations and Applications, T0 Cross-Connect/Checkerboarding Restrictions”, of 363-208-000, SLC-2000 Access System, Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide . If… Then… Observe the following restrictions when cross-connecting to...
  • Page 703 This command will cross-connect 768 physical lines to 768 logical lines of the TR-303 VRT. For other cross-connect configurations, refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for information on CIT commands. STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE.
  • Page 704 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-524 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 10 Install New DLC Generic Program Summary: This procedure is to be used at the SLC ® -2000 Access System when a BBF261 SMU needs to be upgraded with a higher generic. You must connect a PC either locally to the user interface panel (UIP) or remotely to the rear CIT port and run TERM to load software.
  • Page 705 DLP-524: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 10 Issue 9, April 1998 CAUTION: Unexpected problems can result when loading software from an MS-DOS window running under the Windows 95 platform. When loading software in the SLC -2000 Access System, run the CTRM program directly from DOS.
  • Page 706 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-524 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 10 NOTE: The default data rate for the CTRM terminal emulator is 9,600 baud. If a data rate other than 9,600 baud is being used, enter " Alt-c " and follow the instructions on the CTRM screen to set the terminal emulator data rate to match the selected data rate selected by the SET-BAUD UIP command.
  • Page 707 Issue 9, April 1998 15. At the login < prompt, enter the login (LUC01, LUC02, or LUC03) and the password (SLC-2000). Response: The PC prompts with Press <CR> to continue ..Press Return after system prompt to generate alarm summaries.
  • Page 708 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-524 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 10 When the generic SMU software is downloading to the SLC -2000 system, you will notice the following: Response: The SMU FAULT LED starts to flash and the disable LED lights, indicating program is being loaded.
  • Page 709 DLP-524: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 6 of 10 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: In this procedure it is assumed the installation will be done using the diskette(s). CAUTION: Unexpected problems can result when loading software from an MS-DOS window running under the Windows 95 platform. When loading software in the SLC -2000 Access System, run the CTRM program directly from DOS.
  • Page 710 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-524 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 10 26. Enter term or term COMn to select a PC serial communication port (COM2, COM3, or COM4) other than the default COM1 port. Response: A brief message is displayed and you are instructed to Press any key to continue .
  • Page 711 Response: login < appears immediately after you enter 1. 34. At the login < prompt, enter the login (LUC01, LUC02, or LUC03) and the password (SLC-2000). Response: The PC prompts with Press <CR> to continue ..Press Return after system prompt to generate alarm summaries.
  • Page 712 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-524 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 9 of 10 36. Enter a "y" or "yes" and a carriage return to continue with software installation. 37. The generic software comes in many files and may be on several diskettes. If the software is on separate floppies, you must swap disks in the drive after the following message appears: Ready for next diskette.
  • Page 713 DLP-524: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 10 of 10 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: If the software download is being performed from a remote CIT location, there is a possibility that the modem connected to the rear RT CIT port will not disconnect properly from the CIT port after the software has downloaded.
  • Page 714 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-525 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 5 Connect CIT and Establish Session (Release 4.0 and Later) General: This procedure is intended to be used at the SLC ® -2000 remote terminal (RT) to connect a craft interface terminal (CIT) and login to the synchronous optical network (SONET) or digital loop carrier (DLC) subsystem.
  • Page 715 ASCII terminal. Comment: Refer to the "Ordering" chapter in document 363-208-000, SLC-2000 Access System, Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide , for a partial summary of compatible CIT terminals, PCs, and modems. RS-232 cable to connect PC Serial port to user interface panel CIT port.
  • Page 716 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-525 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 5 Press the user interface panel Escape button and then the Scroll Menu down arrow button until SET-BAUD: <ent> is displayed. Press the user interface panel Enter button then the Scroll Menu down arrow button until the desired baud rate is displayed (9,600 is the default for the terminal emulator software, SYSCTL, and UIP).
  • Page 717 10. The CIT will respond with an identification message followed by a prompt. You are ready to enter commands. Refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for available commands. To end a CIT session enter, logout and disconnect the CIT.
  • Page 718 |command. The CIT will then display a prompt. You are ready to enter commands. Refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for available commands. To end a CIT session, enter logout and disconnect the CIT.
  • Page 719 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-526 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 1 Establish INA T1 Cross-Connections NOTE: See the section on INA cross-connections in Chapter 4 of this manual (before the TOPs sections). Obtain the work order. Using the work order, establish the INA cross-connection using the ent-crs-t1 CIT command.
  • Page 720 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-527 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 1 Establish INA T0 Cross-Connections NOTE: See the section on INA cross-connections in Chapter 4 of this manual (before the TOPs section). Obtain the work order. Using the work order, establish the INA cross-connection for either metallic circuits or FITL circuits using one of the following CIT commands.

  • Page 721: Replace Core Circuit Packs

    363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-528 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Replace CORE Circuit Packs Overview: This procedure describes the steps required to minimize the disruption to the SLC ® -2000 Access System when replacing the core circuit packs. These packs include the TSI and the BMP circuit pack.
  • Page 722 DLP-528: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 Replace the CORE-2 circuit pack as shown in Table A. Table A – Replacing the CORE-2 Circuit Packs Step Number Procedure At the UIP, execute the SWITCH-CORE:FORCE->1 command. Replace the circuit pack.
  • Page 723 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-528 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 Replace the CORE-1 circuit pack as shown in Table B. Table B – Replacing the CORE-1 Circuit Packs Step Number Procedure At the UIP, execute the SWITCH-CORE:FORCE->2 command. Replace the circuit pack.

  • Page 724: Replace Vtu/Liu Circuit Packs

    363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-529 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 4 Replace VTU/LIU Circuit Packs Overview: This procedure describes the steps required to minimize the disruption to the SLC ® -2000 Access System during replacement of VTU or LIU circuit packs. To safely remove a service VTU/LIU circuit pack, it must be protected by the protection pack (VTU/LIU-8).
  • Page 725 DLP-529: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 4 Issue 9, April 1998 At the UIP, execute the RETRIEVE-FAULTS command and look for an ls-a-x on protection message for the pack to be replaced. Is VTU-8 protecting the VTU being replaced? If YES, then continue with Step 7.
  • Page 726 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-529 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 4 10. Is the circuit pack being replaced LIU-8? If YES, then continue with Step 11. If NO, go to Step 13. 11. At the UIP, execute the RETRIEVE-FAULTS command to see if there are any ls-a-x on protection messages.
  • Page 727 DLP-529: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 4 of 4 Issue 9, April 1998 15. Is LIU-8 protecting any other LIU? If YES, then the condition requiring the protection of the other pack needs to be cleared, so the pack to be replaced can be protected.
  • Page 728 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-530 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Determine If Shelves or Assemblies Are Misaligned, Bowed, Bent, or Twisted During Acceptance Testing Summary: If you have a plug-in unit available for a specific shelf or assembly, insert the plug-in in its slot to determine if it is misaligned, bowed, bent, or twisted.
  • Page 729 DLP-530: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 2 Issue 9, April 1998 Determine which shelf or assemblies you have inspected and choose the next assembly for inspecting. If you've inspected ... And the system ... Then ... ARM shelf only —...
  • Page 730 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-531 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Test Individual DS1 Circuits During Turnup Summary: This procedure gives the steps for testing individual DS1 circuits between the ARM shelf and the cross-connect panel during ARM shelf turnup. You begin by in- stalling a patch cord loopback (OUT jack to IN jack) at the DSX cross-connect panel for one of the DS1 channels.
  • Page 731 DLP-531: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 2 Issue 9, April 1998 Have all DS1 channels been tested? If NO, continue with Step 10. If YES, STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. 10. Choose the next channel to test. Return to Step 2. 11.
  • Page 732 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-532 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Verify That Alarms Will Activate During MDS Assembly Turnup Summary: Using the UIP, activate the alarms shown in Table A using the TEST-VRT-ALARM command. CAUTION: Perform this procedure from the RT only during MDS assembly turnup. NOTE: The TEST-VRT-ALARM command will send an alarm (Major, Minor, Digroup A, B, C, or D) for 30 seconds in the selected system and then automatically clear...
  • Page 733 DLP-532: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 2 Issue 9, April 1998 Using Table A, verify that the proper alarms activate at both the near end and far end. Table A – TEST-VRT-ALARM Alarm Summary Central Office ® Alarm Selected -2000 Alarms DLC Alarms Remote Alarms...
  • Page 734 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-533 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Perform Channel Tests During MDS Assembly Turnup Summary: With an AUA57 in slot 1 at the RT, connect a test telephone set to the channel unit. Verify that you can dial, talk, ring, and trip-ring on the first channel. Repeat the procedure with the channel unit in slot 5.
  • Page 735 DLP-533: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 2 Issue 9, April 1998 At the CO, connect dial tone to the following channels: • Slot 1 — Channel 1 • Slot 5 — Channel 25. With the telephone set at the RT, verify that you can dial, talk, ring, and trip-ring on channel 1.
  • Page 736 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-534 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 8 Install or Replace BBG8 SYSCTL Ensure that the BBG9 OHCTL is installed (DLP-501). CAUTION: Take care to avoid damaging the LEDs that protrude through the openings in the faceplate of the circuit packs during handling and circuit pack installation.
  • Page 737 DLP-534: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 Edge Connector 6 7 8 3 4 5 Component Side Figure 1 – BBG8 SYSCTL Option Settings CAUTION: Transmission configuration information for in-service systems is stored on the TGS circuit pack in TIMING slot 1.
  • Page 738 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-534 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 8 NOTE: If the system is in service and both the SYSCTL and OHCTL are being replaced, the following step is highly recommended to protect against a loss of service because of installing a SYSCTL with incompatible software.
  • Page 739 DLP-534: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 4 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 If the following responses do not occur, proceed to Step 13. Otherwise, proceed to Step 14. Response: FAULT LED on BBG8 SYSCTL lights after approximately 5 seconds. MJ and NE may light or flash briefly.
  • Page 740 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-534 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 8 NOTE: Ignore the MJ, MN, and NE ACTY LEDs on the User Panel. Install the SYSCTL circuit pack. If the following responses do not occur, proceed to Step 13. Response: FAULT LED on BBG8 SYSCTL lights and Abnormal LED on the User Panel lights after approximately 5 seconds.
  • Page 741 DLP-534: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 6 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 Displayed letters or conditions indicate one of the following: Nothing displayed in the FE ID display indicates that compatible software is installed in the OHCTL and SYSCTL. The letter P displayed in the FE ID display indicates that no software is installed in the SYSCTL.
  • Page 742 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-534 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 8 16. Is the BBG8 SYSCTL being installed in the shelf for the first time (initial shelf turnup) or is it being replaced in an in-service system? If BEING INSTALLED, then continue with Step 17. If BEING REPLACED, then proceed to Step 18.
  • Page 743 DLP-534: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 8 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 20. Find circuit packs with compatible software and repeat this procedure, or install new software using the procedures of DLP-513. STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. 21. To force the system to run the current software, perform the following: Ensure that a TGS circuit pack is installed in the TGS-2 slot.
  • Page 744 NBS, octet mode, and actual or virtual slots. For a detailed description of the virtual channel unit slot concept, refer to Channel Unit Installation: DLP-617 or document 363-208-000, SLC-2000 Access System, Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide .
  • Page 745 DLP-535: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 Quad NBSQ-A (VDT=2-13) Logical slot numbers Physical slot numbers Logical slot numbers Quad NBSQ-B (VDT=5-1) Quad NBSQ-A (VDT=2-13) Logical slot numbers Physical slot numbers Logical slot numbers (5) (6) Octet NBSQ-B Not used...
  • Page 746 Refer to "Channel Unit Installation: Introduction-000" for slot restrictions that must be observed when installing the AUA94 and SPQ 494 channel units in a FiberReach NBS. Refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for a detailed description of the CIT commands used in this procedure.
  • Page 747 DLP-535: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 4 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 Delete all ISDN T0 provisioning in NBSQ being converted using the dlt-t0 command. Example of deleting ISDN T0 provisioning in NBSQ-B (Figure 1): NOTE: The only ISDN lines in NBSQ-B are associated with the AUA94 channel unit located in physical slot 9.
  • Page 748 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-535 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 6 Execute the CIT command ed-dt to change the mode of the NBSQ to the octet mode. Example of changing mode (Figure 1): ed-dt::aid=dt-5-1:dtype=nbs:line=24:mode=octet; <-- for NBSQ-B Remove the channel units from the last three physical slots in the NBSQ being converted (slots 4, 5, and 6 for NBSQ-A or slots 10, 11, and 12 for NBSQ-B).
  • Page 749 DLP-535: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 6 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 Execute the CIT command ent-crs-t0 for each DSL to create t0 cross-connections between the virtual drops and the physical drops. Example of creating cross-connections (Figure 1): NOTE: The slot numbers that appear in parentheses in the following example are the logical slot numbers shown in Figure 1.
  • Page 750 V-DT are not physically present. However, they are present in the software and are called virtual slots . For a detailed description of the virtual channel unit slot concept, refer to Channel Unit Installation: DLP-617 or document 363-208-000, SLC-2000 Access System, Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide .
  • Page 751 DLP-536: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 Octet NBSQ-C Octet NBSQ-A (VDT=2-13) (VDT=5-1) Logical slot numbers Physical slot Logical numbers slot numbers Quad NBSQ-B Quad NBSQ-A (VDT=2-13) Logical slot numbers Physical slot numbers Logical slot Quad NBSQ-B numbers...
  • Page 752 Refer to "Channel Unit Installation: Introduction-000" for slot restrictions that must be observed when installing the AUA94 channel unit in a FiberReach NBS. Refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for a detailed description of the CIT commands used in this procedure.
  • Page 753 DLP-536: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 4 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 Delete all ISDN T0 provisioning in NBSQ being converted using the dlt-t0 command. Example of deleting ISDN T0 provisioning in NBSQ-B (Figure 1): NOTE: The slot numbers that appear in parentheses in the following example are the logical slot numbers shown in Figure 1.
  • Page 754 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-536 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 7 Example of deleting T0 cross-connections (Figure 1): NOTE: The slot numbers that appear in parentheses in the following example are the logical slot numbers shown in Figure 1. For NBSQ-A: <--CH1 SPQ 494 (slot 1) dlt-crs-t0::v3dp-1-140,dtdp-2-13-1-1;...
  • Page 755 DLP-536: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 6 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 Execute the CIT command ed-dt to change the mode of the NBSQ to the quad mode. Example of changing mode (Figure 1): ed-dt::aid=dt-5-1:dtype=nbs:line=0:mode=octet; <-- for NBSQ-C ed-dt::aid=dt-2-13:dtype=nbs:line=24:mode=quad; <-- for NBSQ-A NOTE: The DS1 connection to NBSQ-C can be removed at this time.
  • Page 756 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-536 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 7 <--CH4 SPQ 400 (slot 4) ent-crs-t0::v3dp-1-153,dtdp-2-13-4-4; <--CH1 SPQ 400 (slot 5) ent-crs-t0::v3dp-1-154,dtdp-2-13-5-1; <--CH2 SPQ 400 (slot 5) ent-crs-t0::v3dp-1-155,dtdp-2-13-5-2; <--CH3 SPQ 400 (slot 5) ent-crs-t0::v3dp-1-156,dtdp-2-13-5-3; ent-crs-t0::v3dp-1-157,dtdp-2-13-5-4; <--CH4 SPQ 400 (slot 5) ent-crs-t0::v3dp-1-158,dtdp-2-13-6-1;...
  • Page 757 The CIT apply command must be used to overwrite the original executing copy of software with the new dormant software version. Refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for a description of the CIT apply command.
  • Page 758 DLP-537: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 12 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: If you want to load new software to a shelf in a remote network element (if allowed) directly from a PC, use the ins-prog: tid command where the TID entered is that of the remote shelf where you want to install the new software.
  • Page 759 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-537 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 12 Obtain the following equipment: † compatible personal computer (PC) running an MS-DOS computer program operating system, Release 3.0 or later. RS-232 cable to connect PC COM1 port to user interface panel CIT port. Working copies of the new system generic program diskette(s).
  • Page 760 DLP-537: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 4 of 12 Issue 9, April 1998 Use the appropriate MS-DOS command (for example, a: or b:) to go to the drive with the floppy disk installed (or use the cd command to move to the appropriate hard drive directory).
  • Page 761 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-537 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 12 CAUTION: Only one cpy-prog procedure at a time should be performed in the same maintenance subnetwork. Simultaneous cpy-prog procedures in the same network may fail. Connect the PC to the CIT port by connecting one end of an RS-232 cable to the COM1 port of the PC (use a 9-pin to 25-pin converter, if necessary) and the other end of the cable to the UIP CIT port (see Figure 1).
  • Page 762 DLP-537: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 6 of 12 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: To set baud rate automatically, enter two carriage returns (<cr>), two lowercase "a"s (aa), or two uppercase "A"s (AA). All other characters are ignored. Enter two carriage returns. Response: CIT prompts with: /* Enter a shelf number from 1 to 8 */ shelf [default] =...
  • Page 763 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-537 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 12 If security has been enabled, enter your login, and then enter your password when prompted. If security has not been enabled, enter a carriage RETURN. Response: The CIT will display an alarm summary generated by the rtrv-alm: all command.
  • Page 764 DLP-537: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 8 of 12 Issue 9, April 1998 17. Was response correct? If YES, then proceed to Step 31. If NO, then continue with Step 18. 18. Wait approximately 10 minutes for the network to stabilize then repeat this procedure from Step 10.
  • Page 765 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-537 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 9 of 12 NOTE: The default shelf is the shelf physically connected to the PC. To set baud rate automatically, enter two carriage returns (<cr>), two lower case "a"s (aa), or two upper case "A"s (AA). All other characters are ignored. Enter two carriage returns.
  • Page 766 DLP-537: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 10 of 12 Issue 9, April 1998 26. Enter the command ins-prog: tid Where tid = the target identifier (shelf name) for the far-end shelf having the new program installed. Response: /* Testing For Program Installation... */ After several seconds, the PC displays a Caution! message followed by the prompt: Execute? y/n =.
  • Page 767 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-537 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 11 of 12 30. Wait approximately 10 minutes for the network to stabilize, exit term, then repeat this procedure from Step 19. If the second attempt to download software fails, do Trouble Clearing: TAP-108. You may have to go to the remote site.
  • Page 768 Once the installation begins, the dormant copy is installed in approximately 10 minutes. Refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for a description of the CIT apply command. The "apply" command allows you to coordinate the software download across the network.
  • Page 769 The CIT apply command must be used to overwrite the original executing copy of software with the new dormant software version. Refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for a description of the CIT...
  • Page 770 DLP-538: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 14 Issue 9, April 1998 Obtain the following equipment: † compatible personal computer (PC) running an MS-DOS computer program operating system, Release 3.0 or later. RS-232 cable to connect PC COM1 port to user interface panel CIT port. Working copies of the new system generic program diskette(s).
  • Page 771 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-538 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 14 Use the appropriate MS-DOS command (for example, a: or b:) to go to the drive with the floppy disk installed (or use the cd command to move to the appropriate hard drive directory).
  • Page 772 DLP-538: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 4 of 14 Issue 9, April 1998 -48V(UIP)/2A -48V(A)/10A -48V -48V -48V DDS Clock DDS DS0 T-R T1-R1 E&M +5V(CIT)/0.5A -48V(B)/10A 25-pin Left side connector of UIP tpa 820314/01 Figure 1 – Typical Craft Interface Terminal (CIT) Observe one of the following indications on the SYSCTL FE ID display.
  • Page 773 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-538 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 14 The letter d in the FE ID display indicates that the OHCTL has no software or that software in the OHCTL and SYSCTL is incompatible. Proceed to Step 23. The letter C displayed in the FE ID display indicates that software is installed in the OHCTL and SYSCTL, but it will not support the current shelf transmission configuration.
  • Page 774 DLP-538: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 6 of 14 Issue 9, April 1998 Letter "P" in FE ID Display CAUTION: If PC hard drive is being used, ensure you are in the correct directory. If floppies are being used, ensure the first (number 1) diskette is installed in floppy drive.
  • Page 775 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-538 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 14 12. Did the letter "C" appear in the FE ID display? If NO, then STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. If YES, then proceed to Step 27. FE ID Display Blank CAUTION: If PC hard drive is being used, ensure you are in the correct directory.
  • Page 776 NOTE: After the system prompt (<), the system will respond normally to commands entered. Refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for a description of the commands. Use rtrv-ne command to retrieve the name ( tid ) of the shelf having new program installed or see TID in response above.
  • Page 777 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-538 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 9 of 14 20. Enter a "y" or "yes" and a carriage return to execute the program. Software download may take up to 45 minutes. Response: UIP ABN LED lights and a P is displayed in SYSCTL FE ID display in the shelf receiving the program.
  • Page 778 DLP-538: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 10 of 14 Issue 9, April 1998 Letter "d" or "P." in FE ID Display CAUTION: If PC hard drive is being used, ensure you are in the correct directory. If floppies are being used, ensure the first (number 1) diskette is installed in floppy drive.
  • Page 779 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-538 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 11 of 14 26. Did the letter "C" appear in the FE ID display? If NO, then proceed to Step 34. If YES, then continue with Step 27. Letter "C" in FE ID Display CAUTION: If the system is in service and is forced to run the current software that is displaying a C, service interruption may result.
  • Page 780 DLP-538: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 12 of 14 Issue 9, April 1998 30. Did the download start as indicated by the In progress message and rows of dots? If NO, then continue with Step 31. If YES, then proceed to Step 32. 31.
  • Page 781 Once the installation begins, the dormant copy is installed in approximately 10 minutes. Refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for a description of the "apply" command. The "apply" command allows you to coordinate the software download across the network.
  • Page 782 DLP-538: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 14 of 14 Issue 9, April 1998 37. Execute the apply command at the shelf to receive the software. Response: A "P" appears in the FE ID display when the installation begins. The SYSCTL resets after the software is installed. SYSCTL FE ID display and UIP LEDs go off.
  • Page 783 R4.5 or later software be installed in the system as part of the conversion. CAUTION: This procedure will interrupt service for any SLC-2000 MSDT currently being served by DT Servers in the MDS being converted. NOTE:...
  • Page 784 DLP-539: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 2 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 Run new MDS DS1 cables, ED-7C723-35, Group 19 (Comcode 601845472), between the MDS and DSX-1 panel. NOTE: Any of the cables listed in Table A can be used between the MDS and the DSX-1 panel instead of the ED-7C723-35, Group 19 cables.
  • Page 785 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-539 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 7 Figure 1 – MDS/DSX-1 Cabling Connections...
  • Page 786 When an MSDT is found to have no active calls, use the CIT ed-dt command to reprovision service on the MSDT for zero lines of service. (Refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for the ed-dt command pages.) Repeat the procedure for all MSDTs on the system.
  • Page 787 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-539 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 7 12. Connect the ED-7C723-35, Group 18, HDOS cable connectors P191-1, P191-2, P192-1, and P192-2 to the HDOS connectors J191-1, J191-2, J192-1, and J192-2, respectively (refer to Figure 2). 13.
  • Page 788 DLP-539: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 6 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 Table B – MDS Server Circuit Pack Slot Association (Odd Shelves) P191/P192 ED-7C723-35, G17 Shelf Shelf Pins MDS Slot DSX-1 Colors Conn. CU 0 Connector Pins R,T (Note) 1 (Odd) J101...
  • Page 789 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-539 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 7 Table C – MDS Server Circuit Pack Slot Association (Even Shelves) P191/P192 ED-7C723-35, G17 Shelf Shelf Pins MDS Slot DSX-1 Colors Conn. CU 0 Connector Pins R,T (Note) 2 (Even) J201...
  • Page 790 R4.5 or later software be installed in the system as part of the conversion. CAUTION: This procedure will interrupt service for any SLC-2000 FiberReach NBS currently being served by DT Servers in the MDS being converted. NOTE: Since the HDOS does not have the capability to equalize long cables, the DSX-1 cross-connection and the HDOS must be in the same or adjacent bays.
  • Page 791 When an NBS is found to have no active calls, use the CIT ed-dt command to reprovision service on the NBS for zero lines of service. (Refer to 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for the ed-dt command pages.) Repeat the procedure for all NBSs on the system.
  • Page 792 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-540 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 6 Figure 1 – MDS/DSX-1 Cabling Connections...
  • Page 793 DLP-540: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 4 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: There is one ED-7C723-34, Group 6, cable assembly per MDS shelf. Disconnect the ED-7C723-34, Group 6, cable connections on the MDS side. Connect the new ED-7C723-35, Group 17, cable connectors J101 to J104 to the ED-7C723-32, Group 2 through 5, danglers (P101 through P104) from each MDS (refer to Figure 1) in matching increasing order.
  • Page 794 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-540 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 6 Table B – MDS Server Circuit Pack Slot Association (Odd Shelves) P191/P192 ED-7C723-35, G17 Shelf Shelf Pins MDS Slot DSX-1 Colors Conn. CU 0 Connector Pins R,T (Note) 1 (Odd) J101...
  • Page 795 DLP-540: Detailed Level Procedures 363-208-001 Page 6 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 Table C – MDS Server Circuit Pack Slot Association (Even Shelves) P191/P192 ED-7C723-35, G17 Shelf Shelf Pins MDS Slot DSX-1 Colors Conn. CU 0 Connector Pins R,T (Note) 2 (Even) J201...
  • Page 796 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-541 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 6 Condition and Connect Modems to Establish Communication From Remote CIT Location General: This procedure may be used to connect modems and a craft interface terminal (CIT) to the SLC ®...
  • Page 797 ASCII terminal. Comment: Refer to the "Ordering" chapter in document 363-208-000, SLC-2000 Access System, Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide , for a partial summary of compatible CIT terminals, PCs, and modems. Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
  • Page 798 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-541 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 6 Two RS-232 cables to connect modems to PC Serial port and rear CIT port. Comment: In this procedure it is assumed you are familiar with the characteristics and operating procedures of your terminal or PC and the MS-DOS operating system.
  • Page 799 Page 4 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 Set the modem to answer incoming calls. For example, if you are using an Lucent Technologies 2224 CEO modem, do the following to program the modem: NOTE: It is assumed the PC and modem ("AT" command compatible) are powered and the PC is loaded with communications software.
  • Page 800 363-208-001 Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-541 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 6 10. Connect the remote modem to the COM1 port of the CIT using a standard RS-232 cable (use a 9-pin to 25-pin converter, if necessary). 11. Verify that the telephone line is plugged into the modem. NOTE: Security is available to protect against unauthorized access to the system.
  • Page 801 • To change back to the SONET subsystem at any time, enter SON at the prompt. Refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for available commands. To end a CIT session, enter logout and disconnect the CIT.
  • Page 802 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: Introduction-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 19 Introduction to Installing SLC ® -2000 Channel Units Metallic Distribution This section covers the installation and testing of channel units and servers in the SLC -2000 Access System. These procedures test from the RT channel unit to the originating end.
  • Page 803 DDM-2000 FiberReach NBS allows multiple virtual MSDTs (V-MSDTs). Each V-MSDT can serve up to 12 or 24 channels, as determined by the DT server configuration. Refer to document 363-208-000, SLC-2000 Access System, Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide , for additional information on the V-MSDT concept.
  • Page 804 FiberReach NBS. Refer to the section entitled "ISDN Channel Units," located later in the chapter, for details concerning the slot and provisioning restrictions. See document 363-205-004, SLC-2000 MSDT Feature, User/Service Manual or document 363-206-301, DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer, Narrowband/Wideband Shelf, User/Service Manual , for more information about FITL services.
  • Page 805 Introduction-000: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 4 of 19 Issue 9, April 1998 Table A – Possible DSX-1 Provisioning Combinations for Each V-DT (R4.4 or Later) Provisioned Mode of Each DSX-1 Provisioning Feeding a V-DT in the NBS Combination (Upper Shelf — Slots 1-6 Number Lower Shelf —...
  • Page 806 "Administration and Provisioning", for a list of channel units with options that are selected by means of physical switches or by using a CIT or remote controller. Refer to document 363-208-000, SLC-2000 Access System, Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide , for more information on channel unit options.
  • Page 807 Introduction-000: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 6 of 19 Issue 9, April 1998 Electronic Provisioning The SPQ 456 quad DPT DID channel unit; the AUA41( ), AUA141, AUA44( ), SPQ444, AUA54( ), and SPQ454 4-wire special service channel units; the AUA42( ), AUA142, SPQ 442, AUA43( ), and SPQ 443 E SPOTS channel units;...
  • Page 808 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: Introduction-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 19 • DDM-2000 FiberReach Narrowband Shelf: — Release 4.4 (Quad Mode): The AUA94 channel unit can be used in any virtual DT (V-DT) shelf of the FiberReach NBS hosted by a SLC -2000 HDT.
  • Page 809 Introduction-000: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 8 of 19 Issue 9, April 1998 Table C – ISDN AUA94( ) Channel Unit Locations for the DDM-2000 FiberReach NBS (Quad Mode) Channel Unit Slot Number (Note) Line Size Slot 1 or Slot 2 or Slot 3 or Slot 4 or Slot 5 or...
  • Page 810 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: Introduction-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 9 of 19 ® Table D – Channel Unit Slot Restrictions When Using an AUA94/SPQ 494 in a Three-Slot V-DT (NBS in Octet Mode) Slot 1 can contain a ... Slot 2 can contain a ..
  • Page 811 Introduction-000: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 10 of 19 Issue 9, April 1998 Quad Channel Units SLC -2000 Quad channel units SPQ 300, SPQ 400, and SPQ 909 POTS; SPQ 340, SPQ 440( ), and SPQ 450 SPOTS ; SPQ 442 and SPQ 443 E SPOTS ; SPQ 318 and SPQ 419 coin;...
  • Page 812 The AUA57, AUA232, and MCU 5405 may be used in a DT Server slot in a fiber configured metallic distribution shelf. This feature is primarily used to provide local dial tone or order-wire service(s) through faceplate tip and ring jacks. Refer to document 363-205-004, SLC-2000 Multi-Services Distant Terminal Feature, User/Service and Ordering Manual , for details.

  • Page 813: Slc ® -2000 Access System Channel Units

    Introduction-000: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 12 of 19 Issue 9, April 1998 Channel Units The channel units supported by the SLC -2000 system are shown in Table F. ® Table F – SLC -2000 Access System Channel Units Code Description Data Sheet Terminal #Ch Range...
  • Page 814 SLC -2000 CIT. In Release 4.5 or later, the SPQ 494 can be provisioned from the CIT. ‡ Lucent Technologies recommends the use of Software Release 4.2 or later if you are equipping more than 200 ISDN lines. § The NBS can contain the AUA25B. It does not support the AUA25.
  • Page 815 Introduction-000: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 14 of 19 Issue 9, April 1998 ® Table F – SLC -2000 Access System Channel Units (Continued) Code Description Data Sheet Terminal Range Rel. Inven. Nonprovisionable AUA31 POTS CS 363-005-101 — POTS/ SPOTS CU CS AUA32 363-005-102 COT/RT/MSDT 2...
  • Page 816 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: Introduction-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 15 of 19 ® Table F – SLC -2000 Access System Channel Units (Continued) Code Description Data Sheet Terminal Range Rel. Inven. Nonprovisionable AUA59 SPOTS CU CF 363-005-119 RT/MSDT / 1500Ω/CSA +OHT/ CLASS AUA90...
  • Page 817 ® Table F– SLC -2000 Access System Channel Units (Continued) Code Description Data Sheet Terminal Range Rel. Inven. Manually Provisionable AUA45(B) Dual Ringing Repeater (Manual Ring) 363-005-123 COT/RT/MSDT/ 10 dB AUA56B Dual DID (DPT) 363-005-115 RT/MSDT/NBS 750 (CSA) AUA57 FSR CF 363-005-122 RT/MSDT /NBS 1 900Ω...
  • Page 818 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: Introduction-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 17 of 19 ® Table F– SLC -2000 Access System Channel Units (Continued) Code Description Data Sheet Terminal Range Rel. Inven. Manually Provisionable † ‡ -5205 Metallic Channel Unit TLGD5205 COT/RT/ (Tollgrade) MSDT/NBS...
  • Page 819 Introduction-000: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 18 of 19 Issue 9, April 1998 ® Table F – SLC -2000 Access System Channel Units (Continued) Code Description Data Sheet Terminal Range Rel. Inven. Electronically Provisionable SPQ 454 4-Wire E&M/PLR 363-005-386 COT/RT 500Ω...
  • Page 820 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: Introduction-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 19 of 19 ® Table F – SLC -2000 Access System Channel Units (Continued) Code Description Data Sheet Terminal Range Rel. Inven. Electronically Provisionable AUA54( ) 4-Wire VF Types I & II E&M/PLR 363-005-113 MSDT/NBS 500Ω...
  • Page 821 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: Contents-000 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Contents of This Tab CAUTION: Take care to avoid damaging the LEDs that protrude through the openings in the faceplate of the circuit packs during handling and circuit pack installation. CAUTION: When handling circuit packs, always wear an electrostatic discharge wrist strap connected to an ESD ground jack on the user interface panel (UIP).
  • Page 822 Contents-000: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 2 of 2 Issue 9, April 1998 Test DID Channel at SLC -2000 RT ......DLP-607 Test AUA45( ) Manual Ringdown Channel at SLC -2000 RT.
  • Page 823 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: NTP-080 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 13 Install and Test SLC ® -2000 Channel Units for FITL and Metallic Distribution DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO A list of the channel units available in the SLC -2000 Access System is provided in Channel Unit Installation: Introduction-000.
  • Page 824 NTP-080: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 2 of 13 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO At the SLC -2000 remote terminal, verify that no fault or alarm conditions exist on the system.
  • Page 825 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: NTP-080 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 13 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO NOTE: If an AUA56, AUA56B, or SPQ 456 DPT type channel unit is being installed for service in a TR303 integrated configuration, the local digital switch (LDS) uses the function code RVT and requires the RT to host a DPT type channel...
  • Page 826 ‡ correlate to the COMMON LANGUAGE CLEI Codes found in Table A. Refer to 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , ENT-T0 command for detailed provisioning information. If your channel unit is type Other with Function Code DFLT, you may continue with Step 6.
  • Page 827 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: NTP-080 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 13 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Response: Normally, there will be no alarms. But if the NE Activity LED on the user interface panel (UIP) is illuminated after the channel unit is installed, the following trouble-clearing steps should be performed: If both UIP NE Activity and INCOMP on the MDC in the...
  • Page 828 NTP-080: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 6 of 13 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Response: Normally, there will be no alarms. But if the NE LED on the backplane interface unit (BIU) is lighted after the channel unit is installed, the following trouble-clearing steps should be performed:...
  • Page 829 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: NTP-080 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 13 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 10. Perform channel tests as required: Test single party or SPOTS loop start/ground start channel. DLP-602 Test coin channel end-to-end [AUA33( ), AUA53( ), DLP-603...
  • Page 830 NTP-080: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 8 of 13 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO 14. Install ISDN channel units (AUA90 T-BRITE or AUA93 BRITE II/ AUA293 BRITE III installation and maintenance procedures can be found in Document 363-205-106 or 363-205-107, respectively).
  • Page 831 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: NTP-080 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 9 of 13 Table A – Channel Units with Parameters Provisionable by a CIT Functional CLEI Code Apparatus Codes Software Release (Note) Other AUA25 4.0 and later Other AUA25B 4.0 and later Other AUA27 4.0 and later...
  • Page 832 NTP-080: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 10 of 13 Issue 9, April 1998 Table A – Channel Units with Parameters Provisionable by a CIT (Continued) Functional CLEI Code Apparatus Codes Software Release (Note) Other AUA56B 4.0 and later Other AUA57 4.0 and later Other AUA58...
  • Page 833 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: NTP-080 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 11 of 13 Table A – Channel Units with Parameters Provisionable by a CIT (Continued) Functional CLEI Code Apparatus Codes Software Release (Note) 5SC143 AUA252B 3.3, 4.2 and later 5SC1HE AUA293 3.1, 3.2, 4.0 and later 5SC1JE...
  • Page 834 NTP-080: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 12 of 13 Issue 9, April 1998 Table A – Channel Units with Parameters Provisionable by a CIT (Continued) Functional CLEI Code Apparatus Codes Software Release (Note) 5SCTFF SPQ 452 3.3, 4.2 and later SPQ 453 Other 4.2 and later...
  • Page 835 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: NTP-080 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 13 of 13 Table B – Valid Function Codes for Each Functional CLEI Code Functional CLEI Codes Function Codes (Note) Software Release 5SCU48, 5SC143, and 5SCTFF OCU and SW56 5SCTFF 4.2 and later 5SCU69, 5SCU6E, and SAC1AH DPT, FXO, and TO 3.1 and later...
  • Page 836 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: NTP-081 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Establish SLC ® -2000 for Fiber in the Loop (FITL) Distribution (DT Servers) — MSDT DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Prerequisite: Before starting this procedure, you must perform the acceptance procedures to install the fuses in the high density optics shelf (HDOS) and verify the following:...
  • Page 837 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Install and verify the SLC -2000 DT Server for FITL distribution. DLP-616 For details, see document 363-205-004, SLC-2000 Multi-Services Distant Terminal (MSDT) Feature, User/Service and Ordering Manual .
  • Page 838 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: NTP-082 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Establish SLC ® -2000 for Fiber in the Loop (FITL) Distribution (DT Servers) — FiberReach NBS DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Prerequisite: Before starting this procedure, you must verify the following: •...
  • Page 839 NTP-082: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 2 of 2 Issue 9, April 1998 DO ITEMS BELOW IN ORDER LISTED ..FOR DETAILS, GO TO Install and verify the SLC -2000 DT Server for FITL distribution. DLP-616 For details, see document 363-206-301, DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer, Wideband/Narrowband Shelf, User/Service Manual Comment:...
  • Page 840 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-600 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 23 Set Option Switches on AUA57, AUA41B, AUA45( ), AUA56B, AUA75, SPQ ® 808/809/810/811, AUA52B, AUA252( ), AUA93, AUA293, or PGM -2000 Channel Units General: The AUA57, AUA45( ), AUA75, AUA56B, AUA252( ), SPQ 808, SPQ 809, SPQ 810, SPQ 811, and PGM -2000 channel units have physical option switches that need to be set when used in a SLC -2000 metallic distribution shelf (MDS).
  • Page 841 DLP-600: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 2 of 23 Issue 9, April 1998 What type channel unit do you have? If AUA57, then continue with Step 3. If AUA45 or AUA45B, then proceed to Step 5. If AUA75, then proceed to Step 8. If SPQ 808, then proceed to Step 12.
  • Page 842 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-600 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 23 CAUTION: If the FSR options are set for an invalid selection (for example, more than one frequency group switch set to ON), the BUSY light on the faceplate will flash when the FSR channel unit is installed.
  • Page 843 DLP-600: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 4 of 23 Issue 9, April 1998 AUA57 BUSY Figure 1 – AUA57 RT FSR Channel Unit Option Switches From records on the work order, set the AUA45( ) option switch COT/RT (Figure 2) to the RT position. NOTE: Set this switch in the RT position when installing the channel unit in an MSDT or FiberReach NBS.
  • Page 844 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-600 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 23 AUA45B / 0DB ODD EVEN -3DB Figure 2 – AUA45 Dual Ringing Repeater Channel Unit Option Switches From records on the work order, set the dual AUA75 channel unit option switch COT/RT (Figure 3) to the RT position.
  • Page 845 DLP-600: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 6 of 23 Issue 9, April 1998 AUA75 EVEN BUSY Figure 3 – AUA75 2W PLAR Channel Unit Faceplate and Option Switches 12. Is the DT Server connected to an optical facility through an optical unit in the high density optics shelf (HDOS) serving an MSDT? If YES, then continue with Step 13.
  • Page 846 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-600 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 23 14. Is the DT Server connected to a FiberReach NBS? If YES, then refer to document 363-206-301 for option settings. If NO, then proceed to Step 15. 15.
  • Page 847 18. Obtain one AUA52B office channel unit (OCU) dataport and inspect it for possible damage. 19. Is the host SLC -2000 RT equipped with R4.2 or later? Refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Comment: Commands and Messages , for details of the RTRV-EQPT::SMU command to retrieve the SLC -2000 program version information.
  • Page 848 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-600 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 9 of 23 21. Set option switch CC (Figure 5) to ENABLE to allow the 64-kb/s clear channel operation. Otherwise, set option switch CC to DISABLE. 22. Install the OCU dataport in the MSDT or FiberReach NBS as specified on the work order record detail (WORD) document.
  • Page 849 23. Obtain AUA93 BRITE II channel unit for each ISDN service specified in the circuit/service order or WORD document. 24. Is the host SLC -2000 RT equipped with R4.2 or later? Refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Comment: Commands and Messages , for details of the RTRV-EQPT::SMU command to retrieve the SLC -2000 program version information.
  • Page 850 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-600 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 11 of 23 NOTE: The purpose of the light-emitting diode (LED) test is to verify the FAIL indication. If the BIU CONFIG LED is lighted, the MSDT slot restriction (slot 1, 3, 4, or 6 for 2B+D service) may be violated. On the BIU, press the LED TEST push button and hold it down.
  • Page 851 DLP-600: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 12 of 23 Issue 9, April 1998 30. Channel unit placement is incorrect according to placement rules (the AUA93 cannot be installed in slot 2 or 5 and optioned for 2B+D). Make sure channel unit is optioned correctly and is installed in channel slot specified on circuit/service order or WORD document.
  • Page 852 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-600 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 13 of 23 AUA41B SEALING CURRENT aua41b.ps Figure 7 – AUA41B 4-Wire Channel Unit Faceplate and Switch Location...
  • Page 853 DLP-600: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 14 of 23 Issue 9, April 1998 35. Verify that the slot number specified on the circuit service order conforms to the following placement rules: Bandwidth (Function Code) Valid MDC CU Slot 5 kHz (PGM5) Any CU slot 8 kHz (PGM8) Any CU slot...
  • Page 854 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-600 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 15 of 23 40. Have this channel unit function code (R4.2) and the system cross-connections for this program service already been provisioned by of the CIT, and has the distant PGM -2000 CU been properly installed in a terminal with necessary cross-connections and the connecting facility made operational? If YES, then continue with Step 41.
  • Page 855 DLP-600: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 16 of 23 Issue 9, April 1998 42. Obtain one AUA56B dual DID channel unit and inspect it for possible damage. 43. Locate the ODD/EVEN rocker switches located on the side of the channel unit printed wiring board (refer to Figure 9).
  • Page 856 If NO, then continue with Step 48 (MSDT/NBS). 48. Is the host SLC -2000 RT equipped with R4.2 or later? NOTE: Refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for details of the RTRV-EQPT::SMU command to retrieve the SLC -2000 program version information.
  • Page 857 DLP-600: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 18 of 23 Issue 9, April 1998 49. On the AUA252( ) unit, set option switch 19.2 to ON to provide the 19.2-kb/s data rate. [This switch setting overrides the subscriber data rate selected when provisioning the AUA252( ).] Otherwise, set option switch 19.2 to the position opposite the ON position (off).
  • Page 858 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-600 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 19 of 23 54. Set option switch AB SIG to ON to select the hardware versus software signaling option from the network for switched 56-kb/s service. (This option can only be selected if the SW56 option switch is also set to the ON position.) Otherwise, set option AB SIG to the position opposite the ON position (off).
  • Page 859 DLP-600: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 20 of 23 Issue 9, April 1998 AUA252B 38.4 19.2 38.4 19.2 SW56 SW56 ADIS ENH56 AB SIG Q MON (Not Used) AUA252f.cdr Figure 10 – AUA252B Channel Unit Option Switches 57. Obtain AUA293 BRITE III channel unit for each ISDN service specified in the circuit/service order or WORD document.
  • Page 860 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-600 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 21 of 23 Table C – AUA293 Channel Unit Option Switch (S1) Settings Switch (S1) CU Operation When Position Switch CU Operation When Switch Position On Number Label Switch Position Off (Default Position) Universal Digital Normal EOC...
  • Page 861 DLP-600: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 22 of 23 Issue 9, April 1998 61. Did the channel unit FAIL indicator light and go off as specified in the response? If YES, then STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. If NO, then continue with Step 62. NOTE: The purpose of the light-emitting diode (LED) test is to verify the FAIL indication.
  • Page 862 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-600 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 23 of 23 63. Channel unit placement is incorrect according to placement rules (the AUA293 cannot be installed in slot 2 or 5 and optioned for 2B+D). Make sure channel unit is optioned correctly and is installed in channel slot specified on circuit/service order or WORD document.
  • Page 863 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-601 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 12 Provision Channel Units CAUTION: Nonlocally switched special service circuits carried by an integrated configuration are provided through nail-up/hairpin applications. In the TR-303 RT/HDT, special services are not provisionable from the 5ESS ®...
  • Page 864 DT Server is installed. Any channel (DS0) can be provisioned by using the ED-T0, COPY-T0, or ENT-T0 commands (refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for details on these commands). The channel units listed under CU Code in Table A have specific provisionable parameters that may require provisioning before their circuits will be activated.
  • Page 865 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-601 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 12 never been provisioned, or the channel address provisioning data does not match the channel type installed in the slot, the channel unit will be set to its maximum loss and its signaling function will be disabled.
  • Page 866 As the name expert implies, this command syntax should be used with caution only by experienced craft personnel. Refer to the ENT-T0 DLC subsystem command in 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for a list of the functional COMMON LANGUAGE channel unit.
  • Page 867 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-601 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 12 Table A – Channel Units with Provisionable Parameters Functional † Function Code CU Code CLEI Code FXO, DPT, TO AUA42/142 5SCU69 AUA42B 5SCU6E ® SAC1AH FXS, DPO, TO AUA43 5SCU6A AUA43B...
  • Page 868 DLP-601: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 6 of 12 Issue 9, April 1998 Table A – Channel Units with Provisionable Parameters (Continued) Functional † Function Code CU Code CLEI Code ‡ SPQ 452 OCU, SW56 5SCTFF ‡ DFLT, RVT SPQ 456 SACPDC §...
  • Page 869 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-601 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 12 ® Table B – AUA93 BRITE II and AUA293 BRITE III in SLC -2000 RT, Provisioning and Time Slot Allocation Universal Configuration (AHG13 in SLC 96 COT) Physical Slot Time Slots per TR-08 A,B,C,D...
  • Page 870 DLP-601: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 8 of 12 Issue 9, April 1998 Table C – AUA93 BRITE II and AUA293 BRITE III in SLC ® -2000 MSDT/V-MSDT/V-DT, Provisioning and Time Slot Allocation Universal Configuration (AHG13 in SLC 96 COT) Physical Slot in Time Slots per TR-08 MSDT/V-MSDT/...
  • Page 871 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-601 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 9 of 12 Provision Channel Units NOTE: This procedure does not provide information to determine parameter values. It assumes a work order record detail (WORD), or equivalent document will provide all parameter values needed to provision the circuit.
  • Page 872 DLP-601: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 10 of 12 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: For help, type "?" for acceptable input parameters. At the address= prompt, enter the channel access identifier address in the syntax as determined in Step 2. NOTE: Whenever you are given a "/*Select from */"...
  • Page 873 Confirmation prelude: One or more caution messages will precede the confirmation message. See document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for more information. The channel provisioning settings will be listed. Then the following will appear. Execute? (y/n or CANcel/DELete to quit) = If you enter "y", the provisioning data just entered will be applied.
  • Page 874 DLP-601: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 12 of 12 Issue 9, April 1998 Table D – WORD and CIT Terminology Parameter WORD Name Abbreviation Prompt Expert String -7 dB (J3) -7DB(J3) -7 dB(J3) dBJ3 -7 dB Receive -7DB RCV -7 dB Receive -7 dB Transmit -7DB TRMT -7 dB Transmit...
  • Page 875 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-602 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 6 Test Single-Party or SPOTS ® Loop-Start/Ground-Start Channel ( SPOTS Channel Unit) Summary: This procedure tests POTS and SPOTS loop-start or ground-start function of channel units. At the central office, verify the channel service and telephone number assignments for the channel being tested.
  • Page 876 DLP-602: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 2 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: In an integrated system, channels may be tested using a local test desk or the mechanized loop testing (MLT) system to initiate tests with the ® 5ESS switch software.
  • Page 877 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-602 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 6 Make sure that the PGTC or TBCU is working properly and that you are using the proper procedures. Repeat the channel tests. Did the tests pass? If YES, then proceed to Step 9. If NO, then continue with Step 8.
  • Page 878 DLP-602: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 4 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 14. Use office drawings to check wiring. Look for a tip and ring reversal between the RT and cross-connect terminal. Verify the central office channel and number assignments. Correct the problem before continuing with the next step.
  • Page 879 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-602 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 6 20. Use office drawings to check wiring. Look for a tip and ring reversal between the RT and cross-connect terminal. Verify the central office channel and number assignments. Correct the problem before continuing with the next step.
  • Page 880 DLP-602: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 6 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 29. At the RT does the test telephone ring normally? If YES, then proceed to Step 31. If NO, then continue with Step 30. 30. Look for a tip and ring reversal between the RT and cross-connect terminal. If the telephone does not ring, replace the RT channel unit and repeat from Step 31.
  • Page 881 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-603 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 8 Test Coin Channel End-to-End on Universal ® Carrier System Summary: Before performing this procedure, the coin phone set must be correctly wired for service desired: coin first (CF) or dial tone first (DTF), and must be operating correctly.
  • Page 882 DLP-603: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 2 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 Is channel service CF or DTF? If CF, then continue with Step 6. If DTF, then proceed to Step 21. At RT, lift coin phone handset off-hook, deposit coins less than the initial rate required, and check for dial tone.
  • Page 883 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-603 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 8 11. At RT, dial any digit except "0" or "1". Does dial tone break? If YES, then proceed to Step 13. If NO, then continue with Step 12. 12.
  • Page 884 DLP-603: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 4 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: If deposit is not automatically refunded when operator answers, request operator to return coins. Lift handset, deposit initial rate, call operator, and make normal talk tests. 18.
  • Page 885 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-603 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 8 23. Use RT (and COT for universal configurations) schematic drawings to check wiring. Check for tip and ring reversal at RT (and COT for universal configurations). Correct wiring until dial tone is present at RT. 24.
  • Page 886 DLP-603: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 6 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 29. Is ringing tone present in coin phone handset? If YES, then proceed to Step 31. If NO, then continue with Step 30. 30. Verify central office channel service assignment. Replace RT channel unit and repeat from Step 21.
  • Page 887 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-603 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 8 36. Did operator identify coins? If YES, then proceed to Step 38. If NO, then continue with Step 37. 37. Verify central office channel service assignment. Replace RT channel unit and repeat from Step 5.
  • Page 888 DLP-603: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 8 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 42. Was call completed with normal transmission quality in both directions? If YES, then proceed to Step 44. If NO, then continue with Step 43. 43. Replace RT channel unit and repeat from Step 5. Comment: For universal configurations, replace COT channel unit and repeat from Step 5.
  • Page 889 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-604 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 7 Test Multiparty (2-Party ANI) Channel on Integrated System (DCLU or IDCU to SLC ® -2000 RT) Summary: This procedure tests the multiparty automatic number identification (ANI) channels. At the central office, verify channel service and telephone number assignments for the channel being tested.
  • Page 890 DLP-604: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 2 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 The following items may be used to clear trouble. When test passes, proceed to Step 23. Check test connections and correct them, if needed. Replace the RT channel unit. Make sure the TBCU is working properly and that you are using the proper procedures.
  • Page 891 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-604 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 7 The following items may be used to clear trouble. Check for dial tone after each item. When dial tone is present, proceed to Step 10. Check the test connections and correct them, if needed. Replace the RT channel unit.
  • Page 892 DLP-604: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 4 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 15. The following items may be used to clear trouble. If the first item does not clear the trouble, try the remaining items in sequence until the test telephone (ring party only) rings normally, then continue with Step 16.
  • Page 893 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-604 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 7 21. Lift the handset during ringing. Does the ringing trip normally? If YES, then proceed to Step 23. If NO, then continue with Step 22. 22. Replace the RT channel unit and repeat from Step 8. NOTE: In this procedure, a call trace on a test line is used to test the ANI function of the channel unit.
  • Page 894 DLP-604: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 6 of 7 Issue 9, April 1998 26. The following items may be used to clear trouble. If the first item does not clear the trouble, try the remaining items in sequence until the tip party number appears in the output at the central office, then continue with Step 27.
  • Page 895 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-604 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 7 31. At the central office, use local procedures for your type of office and make reverting call tests on any one channel to one of the test telephones at the RT. 32.
  • Page 896 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-605 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 8 Test Multiparty (2-Party ANI) Channel COT-to-RT on Universal SLC ® Carrier System Summary: This procedure tests the multiparty automatic number identification (ANI) channels. At the central office terminal (COT), connect the test line to the unassigned subscriber line and call numbers to the channel being tested.
  • Page 897 DLP-605: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 2 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 The following items may be used to clear the trouble. Repeat the channel tests after each item until the tests pass, then proceed to Step 27. Check the test connections and correct them, if needed. Replace the RT channel unit.
  • Page 898 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-605 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 8 NOTE: One test telephone set must be wired for ring party; the other test telephone must be wired for tip party with ANI. Ringer connections for various types of ringers and service may be found in document 500-114-100.
  • Page 899 DLP-605: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 4 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 12. The following items may be used to clear trouble. Repeat from Step 8 after each item until the call is completed normally, then continue with Step 13. Replace the RT channel unit.
  • Page 900 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-605 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 8 17. The following items may be used to clear trouble. If the first item does not clear the trouble, try the remaining item until ringing trips normally, then continue with Step 18.
  • Page 901 DLP-605: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 6 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 22. The following items may be used to clear trouble. If the first item does not clear the trouble, try the remaining items in sequence until the test telephone (tip party only) rings normally, then continue with Step 23.
  • Page 902 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-605 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 8 26. The following items may be used to clear trouble. If the first item does not clear the trouble, try the remaining items in sequence until the meter indicates at least 95 V at the central office (or less than 3K ohms on the VOM), then continue with Step 27.
  • Page 903 DLP-605: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 8 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 29. At the RT, does the test telephone ring normally and ringing trip when the handset is lifted off hook? If YES, then proceed to Step 30. If NO, then there is trouble in the central office reverting call circuits.
  • Page 904 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-606 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 6 Test FSR Channel Summary: This procedure tests the frequency selective ringing (FSR) channels for transmission quality and proper ringing. At the central office, verify the channel service and telephone number assignments for the channel being tested. Channels may be tested using a local test desk or the mechanized loop testing (MLT) system.
  • Page 905 DLP-606: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 2 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: Document 662-505-507 provides procedures for TBCU testing. The TBCU can only verify operation of the RT channel unit. NOTE: The local test desk tests only one ringing frequency of the FSR channel unit (the one used for single-party lines).
  • Page 906 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-606 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 6 Make sure the channel unit and telephone numbers have been assigned to the channel being tested. NOTE: Test telephone sets should be connected for bridged ringing with the ringers tuned to the proper ringing frequency (Table A).
  • Page 907 DLP-606: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 4 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 10. At the RT, dial local test desk or central office number and make normal talk tests. 11. Was call completed with normal transmission quality in both directions? If YES, then proceed to Step 13.
  • Page 908 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-606 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 6 15. The following items may be used to clear trouble. If the first item does not clear the trouble, try the remaining items in sequence until the test telephone rings normally, then continue with Step 16.
  • Page 909 DLP-606: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 6 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 19. Is this the last FSR channel to be tested? If YES, then continue with Step 20. If NO, then repeat from Step 1. 20. At the central office, use the local procedures for your type of office and make reverting call tests on any one channel between the test phones at the RT.
  • Page 910 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-607 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Test DID Channel at SLC ® -2000 RT Summary: This procedure tests direct inward dial (DID) channel units between the RT and a DLC terminal in the serving central office. The DLC terminal is typically a SLC 96 COT equipped with a WP42 SPOTS ®...
  • Page 911 DLP-607: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 Set the switches on the 52A test extender as follows: • FEED/HOLD to FEED • FEED NORM/FEED REV to FEED NORM • BATTERY FEED/HOLD FUNCTION to 2W ODD or 2W EVEN, as appropriate.
  • Page 912 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-607 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 13. At the CO, obtain a volt-ohm-multimeter (VOM) and condition it to measure DC volts. 14. At the CO, connect the (+) red lead of the VOM to Tip and the (-) black lead of the VOM to Ring of the channel being tested.
  • Page 913 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-608 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 6 Test AUA45( ) Manual Ringdown Channel at SLC ® -2000 RT Summary: This procedure tests the AUA45( ) manual ringdown channel unit from the RT to the serving CO terminal. The CO terminal may be a DLC COT or a distant D-type channel bank.
  • Page 914 DLP-608: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 2 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 Remove the test connections. ® Is a switched test line available at the RT? (An unassigned POTS or SPOTS derived channel is acceptable.) If YES, then continue with Step 8. If NO, proceed to Step 13.
  • Page 915 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-608 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 6 -2000 COT, 96 COT, or distant D-bank Test AUA45() AUA45() Line RT Ringing Test Arrangement Derived test line from local POTS/ central office SPOTS SLC -2000 COT, 96 COT, or distant D-bank AUA45()
  • Page 916 DLP-608: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 4 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 11. The following items may be used to clear trouble. Try the steps in sequence until the telephone rings normally. Confirm that the test line works. Check for ringing at the faceplate of the AUA45( ) channel unit in the RT. If ringing is not present, check that the test line is properly connected to the AUA45( ).
  • Page 917 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-608 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 6 16. Send the tone through the COT and RT channel units and measure the level at the RT. Does the TMS indicate the RT level specified on the WORD document ±1.0 dB? If YES, then proceed to Step 18.
  • Page 918 DLP-608: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 6 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 21. The following items may be used to clear trouble. Try the items in sequence until the correct level is obtained. Verify channel unit provisioning at the RT and COT and adjust, if required. Replace the CO channel unit.
  • Page 919 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-609 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 4 Test AUA75 Private Line Auto Ring (PLAR) Channel at SLC ® -2000 RT Summary: This procedure tests the AUA75 PLAR channel for transmission performance and ringing operation between the RT and the terminating CO. The CO terminal may be a DLC channel bank or a distant D-type bank.
  • Page 920 DLP-609: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 2 of 4 Issue 9, April 1998 Lift the RT phone after about 30 seconds. Is talking reestablished between the CO and RT, and is talk quality acceptable? Hang up both phones. Lift the RT phone. Does the CO phone ring normally (2 seconds on/4 seconds off)? Is audible ringback tone heard in the RT phone? Answer the CO phone.
  • Page 921 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-609 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 4 At the CO, condition the TMS to send -TRMT (GN) dBm level at 1 kHz as follows: • Set impedance to 900 ohms. • Set the TRMT LEVEL to -TRMT (GN) value from the WORD document. At the RT, condition the TMS to measure the gain from the CO to the RT as follows: •...
  • Page 922 DLP-609: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 4 of 4 Issue 9, April 1998 14. Send the tone through the RT and CO channel units and measure the level at the RT. Does the TMS indicate the CO level specified on the WORD document ±1.0 dB? If YES, then proceed to Step 16.
  • Page 923 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-610 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 6 Perform OCU and Channel Loopback Test at RT Summary: This procedure tests the AUA52( ), AUA152, AUA252( ), or SPQ ® OCU dataport channel unit and the customer loop part of a Digital Data System (DDS) circuit from the SLC ®...
  • Page 924 DLP-610: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 2 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 The following items may be used to clear trouble. Perform the items in sequence. After each item, repeat Step 5 until near-end digital test access is established. If the CIT displayed a warning to check the equipage before testing, inspect for missing or faulty common circuit packs (MDC, PTU, T8U) on the serving distribution shelf.
  • Page 925 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-610 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 6 Figure 1 – Test Connections for OCU Loopback Test Using TPI 108/109 DTU...
  • Page 926 DLP-610: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 4 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 Figure 2 – Test Connections for OCU Loopback Test Using KS-20908/KS-20909 Test Sets...
  • Page 927 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-610 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 6 11. Verify the clock connection from the UIP to the test set(s). Correct the clock connection until the CLOCK indicator is illuminated. If the problem cannot be cleared by correcting the connectors, obtain another test set.
  • Page 928 DLP-610: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 6 of 6 Issue 9, April 1998 17. After 60 seconds, operate the receiver COUNTER MODE to HOLD. Does the counter indicate 000? If YES, then the channel/DSU loopback test passed; continue with Step 18. If NO, then the channel/DSU loopback test failed;...
  • Page 929 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-611 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 2 Adjust Gain of 2-Wire Special Services Channel Unit General: This procedure applies to the AUA42( ), AUA43( ), AUA142, SPQ ® 442, and SPQ 443 E SPOTS ®...
  • Page 930 DLP-611: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 2 of 2 Issue 9, April 1998 Press RETURN to accept the remaining default values which the CIT offers, or enter ; to skip directly to the confirmation message. The CIT displays the following message. Confirmation message: /* Caution! Execution of this command may affect service.
  • Page 931 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-612 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 3 Adjust Gain of 4-Wire Special Services Channel Unit General: This procedure applies to the AUA41/AUA41B, AUA44( ), AUA54( ), ® 444, and SPQ 454 channel unit. Adjustments to the provisioned channel unit attenuation are performed via the ED-T0 CIT command, which is also used for initial provisioning.
  • Page 932 DLP-612: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 2 of 3 Issue 9, April 1998 Is RCV attenuator to be adjusted? If YES, enter the new value when the CIT displays the RCV Attenuator = prompt. Enter ; and proceed to Step 14. If NO, press RETURN to accept the default RCV attenuator value.
  • Page 933 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-612 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 3 10. The transmit and receive gain can be adjusted using the expert-mode CIT dialog. To change the TRMT attenuator, enter the following command as a single line: ED-T0:: address ::::trmt= value ;...
  • Page 934 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-613 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 5 Measure Signal Level End-to-End on Single-Party Channel (ALC Channel Unit Inserting Maximum Loss) Summary: This procedure measures the loss between the central office and the remote terminal (RT) on a channel that uses an automatic loss compensation (ALC) channel unit.
  • Page 935 DLP-613: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 2 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 Lift the telephone handset off-hook (or set the switch to off-hook for the butt set) and remove the low resistance. Verify dial tone and dial the office milliwatt. When the tone is received, set the SU to off-hook and put the telephone handset on hook (or set the switch to on-hook for the butt set).
  • Page 936 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-613 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 5 Table A – 1,004-Hz Signal Levels for Automatic Loss Compensation (ALC) Channel Units (Measured Between the Network Interface and the Central Office) ® Universal Integrated 5ESS Switch Signal Level RT CU COT CU...
  • Page 937 DLP-613: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 4 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 10. At the central office, connect the TMS TRANSMIT jack and the SU to the tip and ring of channel to be tested. Set the switches on the TMS/SU as follows: •...
  • Page 938 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-613 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 5 17. At the RT, set the TMS to transmit 1,004 Hz at 0.0 dBm. 18. At the central office, measure the received signal level and frequency. The level should fall within the range given in Table A for the appropriate channel unit.
  • Page 939 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-614 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 5 Measure Signal Level from Central Office to Network Interface (NIF) on Single-Party Channel (ALC Channel Unit Inserting Expected Loss) Summary: This procedure measures the loss between the central office and the network interface (NIF) on a channel that uses an automatic loss compensation (ALC) channel unit.
  • Page 940 DLP-614: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 2 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: A loop circuit should be terminated with customer equipment, if possible, or with a resistance similar to the real termination in the off-hook state. A telephone set (or butt set) at the NIF may be used to terminate the circuit; however, then the channel unit will provide only an approximate loss.
  • Page 941 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-614 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 5 Table A – 1,004-Hz Signal Levels for Automatic Loss Compensation (ALC) Channel Units (Measured Between the Central Office and the RT) ® Universal Integrated 5ESS Switch Signal Level RT CU COT CU Code for CU...
  • Page 942 DLP-614: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 4 of 5 Issue 9, April 1998 At the central office, connect the TMS TRANSMIT jack and the SU to the tip and ring of the channel to be tested. Set the switches on the TMS/SU as follows: •...
  • Page 943 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-614 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 5 15. At the NIF, set the TMS to transmit 1,004 Hz at 0.0 dBm. 16. At the central office, measure the received level and frequency. The level should fall within the range given in Table A for the appropriate channel unit.
  • Page 944 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-615 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 17 Verify Voice-Frequency Special Service Channel Unit Settings Summary: This procedure measures the loss between the SLC ® -2000 DS0 BIT-STREAM test point and the customer network interface (NIF) [through network channel terminating equipment (NCTE), if present].
  • Page 945 DLP-615: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 2 of 17 Issue 9, April 1998 User Interface Panel Test Jacks The user interface panel (UIP) provides maintenance and testing jacks. These jacks are connected to a circuit using the CONN-TACC craft interface terminal (CIT) command for the DLC subsystem.
  • Page 946 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-615 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 17 T1/R1 DDS Clock TRMT TRMT CHAN CHAN CHAN DROP DROP Notes: Jack labels for UIP test jacks are on the flip-down cover. DS1 jacks are not operative. Use "TRMT"...
  • Page 947 DLP-615: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 4 of 17 Issue 9, April 1998 CIT Test Access Commands There are several DLC subsystem CIT commands associated with channel unit test access. To use these commands, you must connect a CIT to the UIP and log into the DLC subsystem (see DLP-521, DLP-525, or DLP-541).
  • Page 948 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-615 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 17 Table A – Special Service Signaling Bits, Sent to Channel Unit Signaling Bits (sigbit =) Channel Unit Function 0000 0001 0100 0101 1010 1111 0110 AUA41/41B/141 FXS[1,2,3,5] TG,RNG TG,RNGn TGn,RNGn...
  • Page 949 DLP-615: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 6 of 17 Issue 9, April 1998 Confirmation Messages: Some commands may affect service and require confirmation before executing. For example: /* Caution! Execution of this command may affect service. */ /* You have selected the command-name command with these parameters: */ The selected command options will print Execute? (y/n or CANcel/DELete to quit) =...
  • Page 950 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-615 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 17 Verify that the appropriate type channel unit is installed and the channel has been provisioned per requirements on the WORD (work order) document. Use the rtrv-chan:drop- {1-8}-{1-24}-{1-4} (or dtdp-{1-8}-{1, 3, 5, 7, 13, 15, 17, or 19 for R4.4 and earlier or 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, or 23 for R4.5 and later}-{1-6}-{1-4}) command to review the provisioning data.
  • Page 951 DLP-615: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 8 of 17 Issue 9, April 1998 TLPs TLPs L-ICL NCTE CSA cable AUA__ AUA__ DS1 bit stream DS1 bit stream cable SPQ ®_ SPQ ®_ Modem TLPs A-Z Direction A-Z Direction 2-wire without NCTE 2-wire with...
  • Page 952 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-615 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 9 of 17 Refer to Table A and find the channel unit function and the signaling bits column with an " ". Use the signaling bits for that column (for example, 1111) when entering the following command.
  • Page 953 DLP-615: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 10 of 17 Issue 9, April 1998 -48V(UIP)/2A -48V(A)/10A -48V -48V -48V DDS Clock T1-R1 E&M +5V(CIT)/0.5A -48V(B)/10A TRANSMIT RECEIVE To measure receive levels for a 2-wire circuit, you should remove the TRANSMIT lead from the TMS. The hybrid network in 2-wire circuits will alter receive level measurements if a signal is being transmitted.
  • Page 954 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-615 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 11 of 17 11. Verify that the RT channel unit RECEIVE GAIN is set to the WORD document value. Adjust the RT channel unit RECEIVE GAIN no more than 1 dB. At the NIF or loop interface of the NCTE, if present, is the receive level between [(TLP A-Z) −0.6] dBm and [(TLP A-Z) +0.6] dBm? Reference: For AUA42( )/142 or AUA43( ) (2-wire) DLP-611...
  • Page 955 DLP-615: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 12 of 17 Issue 9, April 1998 17. Remeasure the receive level at the NIF (send tone from RT towards NIF). Is the receive level between [(TLP A-Z) −0.6] dBm and [(TLP A-Z) +0.6] dBm (±0.7 with NCTE)? If YES, then proceed to Step 19.
  • Page 956 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-615 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 13 of 17 25. Verify that the RT channel unit TRANSMIT GAIN is set to the WORD document value. Adjust the TRANSMIT GAIN no more than 1 dB. Does the TMS indicate between −0.6 and +0.6 dBm (or within 0.6 dB of TLP Z-A)? Reference: For AUA42( )/142 or AUA43( )/ SPQ 442/ SPQ 443 (2-wire) DLP-611...
  • Page 957 DLP-615: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 14 of 17 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: The slope limits depend on whether the customer equipment is a PBX or other customer premises switching equipment, or a modem/telset or other nonswitched termination. Note the measurement at the NIF. Calculate the low-end slope using this measurement (at 404 Hz) and the measurement from the receive direction noted in Step 19.
  • Page 958 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-615 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 15 of 17 40. Is the low-end slope between −0.5 and +1.5 (PBX) or +2.5 (modem/telset)? If YES, then continue with Step 41. If NO, then note the result for later referral to the circuit provisioning center.
  • Page 959 DLP-615: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 16 of 17 Issue 9, April 1998 NOTE: If the function code = FXS or DPO, the noise measuring set must have the HOLD feature. At the NIF, measure noise. Is the noise less than [(TLP A-Z + 23] dBrnc? If YES, then proceed to Step 52.
  • Page 960 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-615 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 17 of 17 55. At the RT, is the noise less than 23 (or 23 + TLP Z-A) dBrnc? If YES, then replace the NCTE and repeat from Step 47. If NO, then replace the noisy RT channel unit and repeat from Step 47.
  • Page 961 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-616 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 8 Provision and Install DT Server CAUTION: In a SLC -2000 host digital terminal MDS, only DT Servers should be installed in CU slots provisioned for FITL distribution. If channel units other than DT Servers are installed in these slots, service to the associated MSDT or FiberReach NBS could be adversely affected.
  • Page 962 DLP-616: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 2 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 DT Server paired slots for 12-line MSDTs First 12 lines Second 12 lines * Note that 12-line DT Servers are installed in pairs, with 24 lines per pair. Also note that the first server of the pair is installed in one of the slots that is also used for 24-line DT Servers (default provisioning).
  • Page 963 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-616 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 8 DT Server paired slots for 12-line MSDTs First 12 lines Second 12 lines Note that 12-line DT Servers are installed in pairs, with 24 lines per pair. Also note that the first server of the pair is installed in one of the slots that is also used for 24-line DT Servers (default provisioning).
  • Page 964 DLP-616: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 4 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 At the address= prompt, enter the AID determined in Step 2. Response: The CIT will print a message indicating the Lines Provisioned Value, DT Mode, DT Type, DT Address, Available Bandwidth, and CLEI Code for the DT Server slot whose AID you entered.
  • Page 965 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-616 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 8 Is the SPQ 810 or SPQ 811 DT Server being installed at this time? If YES, then proceed to Step 10. If NO, then continue with Step 9. Press DELete or CANcel key.
  • Page 966 DLP-616: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 6 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 18. Did all alarms clear? If YES, then STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. If NO, then continue with Step 19. 19. Clear alarms using TAP-104. Table A – Possible DSX-1 Provisioning Combinations and CIT Commands for NBS (R4.4 and Later) Provisioned Mode of Each DSX-1 Provisioning Feeding a V-DT in the NBS...
  • Page 967 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-616 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 8 ® Table B – SLC -2000 MDS to HDOS Circuit Configuration for R4.4 and Earlier (Notes) MDS, Shelf MSDT MSDT HDOS Fiber First Server Server PCU Slot HDOS OU Label ®...
  • Page 968 DLP-616: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 8 of 8 Issue 9, April 1998 Table B – SLC ® -2000 MDS to HDOS Circuit Configuration for R4.4 and Earlier (Notes) (Continued) MDS, Shelf MSDT MSDT HDOS Fiber First Server Server PCU Slot HDOS OU Label ®...
  • Page 969 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-617 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 1 of 10 Install AUA94 and/or SPQ ® 494 Channel Units in FiberReach NBS General: The AUA94 dual ISDN channel unit can be installed in a FiberReach narrowband shelf (NBS) beginning with Software Release 4.3 (R4.3). With R4.3, the NBS is divided into two 24-line virtual MSDT (V-MSDT) shelves.
  • Page 970 NBS, octet mode, and actual or virtual slots. For a detailed description of the virtual channel unit slot concept, refer to 363-208-000, SLC-2000 Access System, Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide .
  • Page 971 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-617 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 3 of 10 This procedure uses CIT commands in the following sequence to configure an NBS that has not been previously configured for either the quad and or octet mode(s) in order to support the AUA94 and/or SPQ 494 channel unit(s): •...
  • Page 972 Refer to "Channel Unit Installation:Introduction-000" for slot restrictions that must be observed when installing the AUA94 and SPQ 494 channel units in a FiberReach NBS. Refer to document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages , for a detailed description of the CIT commands used in this procedure.
  • Page 973 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-617 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 5 of 10 NOTE: The AUA94 and SPQ 494 channel unit parameters are not provisioned using the CIT. Instead, the T0 and T1 cross-connections for B1 are provisioned from either the CIT or LDS followed by the LDS provisioning the unit parameters and remaining cross-connections.
  • Page 974 DLP-617: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 6 of 10 Issue 9, April 1998 Execute the CIT command ent-crs-t0 for each DSL to create t0 cross-connections between the virtual drops and the physical drops. Example 1 of creating cross-connections (Figure 1): NOTE: The slot numbers that appear in parentheses in the following example are the logical slot numbers shown in Figure 1.
  • Page 975 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-617 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 7 of 10 ent-crs-t0::v3dp-1-156,dtdp-5-1-2-3; <--CH3 SPQ 400 (slot 2) <--CH4 SPQ 400 (slot 2) ent-crs-t0::v3dp-1-157,dtdp-5-1-2-4; <--CH1 SPQ 400 (slot 3) ent-crs-t0::v3dp-1-158,dtdp-5-1-3-1; <--CH2 SPQ 400 (slot 3) ent-crs-t0::v3dp-1-159,dtdp-5-1-3-2; <--CH3 SPQ 400 (slot 3) ent-crs-t0::v3dp-1-160,dtdp-5-1-3-3;...
  • Page 976 DLP-617: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 8 of 10 Issue 9, April 1998 Example 2 of creating cross-connections (Figure 2): NOTE: The slot numbers that appear in parentheses in the following example are the logical slot numbers shown in Figure 2. For NBSQ-A: <--CH1 SPQ 400 (slot 1) ent-crs-t0::v3dp-1-140,dtdp-3-1-1-1;...
  • Page 977 363-208-001 Channel Unit Installation: DLP-617 Issue 9, April 1998 Page 9 of 10 For NBSQ-B: ent-crs-t0::v3dp-1-170,dtdp-6-17-1-1; <--CH1 SPQ 494 (slot 1) ent-crs-t0::v3dp-1-171,dtdp-6-17-1-2; <--CH2 SPQ 494 (slot 1) <--CH3 SPQ 494 (slot 1) ent-crs-t0::v3dp-1-172,dtdp-6-17-4-1; Virtual Slot 4 in NBSQ-B <--CH4 SPQ 494 (slot 1) ent-crs-t0::v3dp-1-173,dtdp-6-17-4-2;...
  • Page 978 DLP-617: Channel Unit Installation 363-208-001 Page 10 of 10 Issue 9, April 1998 ent-crs-t0::v3dp-1-167,dtdp-6-13-5-2; <--CH4 SPQ 494 (slot 2) Virtual Slot 5 in NBSQ-D ent-crs-t0::v3dp-1-168,dtdp-6-13-3-1; <--CH1 AUA94 (slot 3) ent-crs-t0::v3dp-1-169,dtdp-6-13-3-2; <--CH2 AUA94 (slot 3) STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE.

  • Page 979: Administration And Provisioning

    Administration and Provisioning Contents Introduction Administration — SONET and Digital Loop Carrier (DLC) Subsystems Version Recognition Security Upgrading Software — Network Elements Upgrading SONET Subsystem Software Upgrading DLC Subsystem Software Controller Maintenance and Memory Administration Controller Maintenance Memory Administration 5-10 Service-Affecting Actions 5-11 DLC Subsystem...
  • Page 980 Contents Provisioning — SONET Subsystem 5-22 Default Provisioning 5-22 Remote Provisioning 5-23 Automatic Provisioning 5-23 Circuit Pack Replacement 5-23 Memory Administration 5-23 Feature Packaging Provisioning 5-24 Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) Provisioning 5-24 DCC Provisioning 5-25 Cross-Connect Provisioning 5-25 Linear Application Default Cross-Connect Mode 5-27 Manual Cross-Connections 5-27...

  • Page 981: Administration And Provisioning

    Administration and Provisioning Introduction This chapter describes the system administration and provisioning for the ® -2000 Access System. System administration. The system administration section includes the following: — Version recognition — System security — Software upgrades — Controller Maintenance and Memory Administration. Multiplexing and Mapping.

  • Page 982: Administration - Sonet And Digital Loop Carrier (Dlc) Subsystems

    363-208-001 Administration and Provisioning Administration — SONET and Digital Loop Carrier (DLC) Subsystems This section covers the following administrative information for both the SONET and DLC subsystems: Version recognition Security Software upgrades Software compatibility Controller Maintenance and Memory Administration. The integral test head (ITH) is covered in a separate section of this chapter. Version Recognition The SLC -2000 software releases provide automatic version recognition of all hardware, firmware, and software installed in the system.

  • Page 983: Security

    363-208-001 Administration and Provisioning Software Version Information using the CIT. You can use the rtrv-eqpt command on the SONET subsystem CIT to provide version information for the SONET subsystem. For the DLC subsystem, you can use the RTRV-EQPT DLC subsystem CIT command to provide information. The system lists version information for software stored on the SMU along with SMU version information.
  • Page 984 Reports-only users can execute the following SONET subsystem commands: ? (help), logout rlgn set-passwd (their own) toggle all rtrv commands except rtrv-lgn. For details on these and other commands, see document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages . Issue 9 April 1998...

  • Page 985: Upgrading Software - Network Elements

    Depending on the situation, only one or both of the software packages will need to be upgraded. Refer to document 363-208-022, SLC-2000 Access System, DLC Subsystem, Software Release Description , for detailed upgrade procedures. To upgrade the DLC generic software, refer to the "Detailed Level Procedures" tab, "Install New DLC Generic Program."...

  • Page 986: Sonet Subsystem In-Service Upgrade Compatibility

    363-208-001 Administration and Provisioning Table 5-1. SONET Subsystem In-Service Upgrade Compatibility (Note 1) Upgrade to (Note 2) Current SONET Subsystem Release 6.2.n 7.0.n 7.1.n 7.2 9.0.n 11.0.n 11.1 6.2.n 7.0.n 7.1.n 9.0.n 11.0.n 11.1 Notes: 1. All SLC ® -2000 systems and DDM-2000 OC-3 systems in a SONET subnetwork should be using the same version of SONET software.
  • Page 987 If you have BBG7 OHCTL circuit packs with earlier vintages than series S2:4A and you plan to upgrade to ring releases, you should upgrade the BBG7 OHCTL circuit packs by sending the circuit packs to: Lucent Technologies Network Systems Merrimack Valley Works 1600 Osgood Street...

  • Page 988: Upgrading Dlc Subsystem Software

    363-208-001 Administration and Provisioning Since the systems are using OSI software, one system and only one system in the SONET subnetwork must be provisioned as a gateway network element (GNE) directory services network element (DSNE) using the set-ne command. Refer to the TOP procedures in Chapter 4, "Operations and Maintenance (TOP),"...

  • Page 989: Controller Maintenance And Memory Administration

    363-208-001 Administration and Provisioning Table 5-2. DLC Subsystem Installation Times ® -2000 System Software Release Circuit Pack R3.2 R3.3 R4.0 R4.1/R4.2 R4.4 R4.5 R4.6 90 min. 120 min. 110 min. 120 min. 120 min. 120 min. 120 min. 4 min. 5 min.

  • Page 990: Memory Administration

    SYSCTL failure and service is preserved. Memory Administration The SLC-2000 system stores all transmission affecting parameters that are set by software in nonvolatile memory and in the RAM in the appropriate transmission circuit packs. Examples of these parameters include bipolar 8-zero substitution/alternate mark inversion (B8ZS/AMI) encoding on DS1 interfaces, distribution line provisioning data, and cross-connect assignments.

  • Page 991: Service-Affecting Actions

    363-208-001 Administration and Provisioning Service-Affecting Actions The SLC -2000 system is designed to minimize loss of service caused by equipment failure or human action. However, certain controller related actions can cause a loss of provisioning data that affects service in both the DLC and SONET subsystems.

  • Page 992: Sonet Subsystem

    363-208-001 Administration and Provisioning Improper removal of the following circuit packs: — MDC, PTU, or T8U circuit packs. Removal of these packs will cause the 48 lines associated with that pack to go out of service. — Unprotected TSI circuit pack. Removal of an unprotected TSI circuit pack will cause all DLC lines to go out of service.

  • Page 993: Administration - Multiplexing And Mapping

    363-208-001 Administration and Provisioning Use of incompatible software. The system maintains the SONET subsystem provisioning data through a software download to the SYSCTL. Replacing the SYSCTL circuit pack with incompatible software and intentionally overriding the software check could result in a loss of data. Improper removal of the following unprotected circuit packs: —...

  • Page 994: Ds1 To

    (a-1-1). You can override the default mapping using the ent-crs-vt1 and ent-crs-sts1 commands. For more information on these commands, see document 363-208-003, SLC-2000 Access System, Commands and Messages . In the opposite direction, the system demultiplexes a DS1 from an OC-3 as...
  • Page 995 363-208-001 Administration and Provisioning In Table 5-3, each DS1 port address identifies a location — a VT-G in an STS-1 or a VT1.5 in a VT-G. For example: a-1-1, a-1-2, a-1-3 ... c-1-1, c-1-2, c-1-3 ... OC-3 signals contain a maximum of three STS-1 signals. All a location ports are associated with STS-1 number 1, and c location ports are associated with STS-1 number 3.

  • Page 996: Default Ds1 To Vt1.5 Mapping

    363-208-001 Administration and Provisioning Table 5-3. Default DS1 to VT1.5 Mapping DS1 Port VT1.5 VT1.5 VT-G STS-1 Address Within Within Within Within (Note) STS-1 VT-G STS-1 OC-3 a-1-1 a-1-2 a-1-3 a-1-4 a-2-1 a-2-2 a-2-3 a-2-4 a-3-1 a-3-2 a-3-3 a-3-4 a-4-1 a-4-2 a-4-3 a-4-4...
  • Page 997 363-208-001 Administration and Provisioning Table 5-3. Default DS1 to VT1.5 Mapping (Continued DS1 Port VT1.5 VT1.5 VT-G STS-1 Address Within Within Within Within (Note) STS-1 VT-G STS- OC-3 c-1-1 c-1-2 c-1-3 c-1-4 c-2-1 c-2-2 c-2-3 c-2-4 c-3-1 c-3-2 c-3-3 c-3-4 c-4-1 c-4-2 c-4-3...
  • Page 998 363-208-001 Administration and Provisioning DS3 to OC-3 The SLC 2000 system multiplexes a DS3 signal onto an OC-3 signal as follows: The DS3 interface maps directly to the STS-1 signal using asynchronous mapping. Three internal STS-1 signals are multiplexed to an STS-3 signal. The electrical STS-3 signal is then converted to an OC-3 optical signal.

  • Page 999: Oc-3C To Oc-3C (Optional)

    363-208-001 Administration and Provisioning OC-3 to OC-3 The system connects one OC-3 signal to another OC-3 signal as follows: The system receives the OC-3 signal from the optical fiber. An STS-3 signal is recovered from the OC-3 signal. The system demultiplexes the STS-3 signal into three STS-1 signals. The STS-1 signals are routed to other OC-3 interfaces as provisioned.

  • Page 1000: Ds1 To

    363-208-001 Administration and Provisioning DS1 to EC-1 For DS1 signals to EC-1 signals, no manual cross-connections are needed or supported. The system automatically creates default cross-connections based on circuit pack equipage. The system multiplexes the DS1 signal onto an EC-1 signal as follows: Each DS1 is mapped to a VT1.5 signal.

Table of Contents